1 

> 

r  ■  ••  a 

\ 


DUKE 

UNIVERSITY 

LIBRARY 

Treasure  %oom 

%% 


*MM\>  I'JL. 


. 


" 


.1 


i  .*  •.'  *M 


«« 


; 


ft 


t^ 


■  "*    7  ,.,,?_!-.  ■?  »*■ Company.       '• M  Gnrff/a.n.y 




Mr.-/,.      , 


r    i 


TTT  1  ,1  I  i_i_q 

ittii: 


tjitetzn 

ih  fb*t  Art*/ 

H    7^/W   Jwy* 
25    ^v/yW     '.vy' 


V 


THE  ONLY  COPY-RIGHT  EDITION. 
, f 


RIFLE 


INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


REVISED  AND  IMPROVED 


Lieut.  Gen.  W.  J.  HARDEE,  C.  S.  ARMY. 


NINTH  EDITION. 


Vol.  I. 

SCHOOLS  OF  THE  SOLDIER  AND  COMPANY; 
INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


MOBILE  : 

S.  H.  GOETZEL. 


1S63. 


Entered,    according  to  Act   of  Congress,  in  the  year  1;  01,  \>y 

S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO., 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Alabama,  for  the 
Confederate  States  of  America. 


~K 


NOTICE.71 


03^  So  many  editions  of  my  "  INFANTRY 
AND  RIFLE  TACTICS  "  having  lately  been 
published,  I  think  it  due  to  both  the  Public  and 
Publishers  to  state  : 

m*  That  the  COPYRIGHT  EDITION  of  my 
INFANTRY  and  RIFLE  TACTICS,  published 

by  S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO.;  in 

Mobile,  is  the  only  COMPLETE,  CORRECT 
and  REVISED  EDITION,  and  this  edition 
only  contains  the  improvements  and  changes 
which  I  have  recently  made,  adapting  the  manual 
to  the  use  of  the  arms  generally  in  .the  hands  of 
the  troops  in  the  Confederate  States. 

W.  J.  HARDEE, 
Colonel  Confederate  States  Army. 
Fort  Morgan,  June  18th,  1861. 


0044 


RIFLE  AND  INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


TITLE    FIRST 


Article  First. 

Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  order  of  Battle, 

or  in  Line. 

1.  A  Regiment  is  composed  of  ten  companies, 
which  will  habitually  be  posted  from  right  to  left,  in 
the  following  order:  first,  sixtb,  fourth,  ninth,  third, 
eighth,  fifth,  tenth,  seve^h,  second,  according  to  the 
rank  of  captain^. 

2.  With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same 
principle  will  be  observed,  viz:  the  first  captain  will 
command  the  right  company,  the  second  captain  the 
left  company,  the  third  captain  the  right  centre  com- 
pany, and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  desiguatecl 
from  right  to  left,  first  company,  second  company, 
&c.  This  designation  will  be  observed  in  the  man- 
oeuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever 
their  denomination,  will  form  the  first  division:  the 

190044 


6  FORMATION  OF.  THE  BATTALION. 

next  two  companies  the  second  division:  and  so  on,  to 
the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal 
parts,  which  will  be  designated  as  the  first  and  second 
platoon,  counting  from  the  right ;  and  each  platoon,  in 
like  manner,  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections. 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres  every  regiment, 
or  part  of  a  regiment,  composed  of  two  or  more  com- 
panies, will  be  designated  as  a*battalion. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  guard  t©  be  hereinafter  de- 
signated, will  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre 
battalion  company.  That  company,  and  all  on  its 
right,  will  be  denominated  the  right  icing  of  the  bat- 
talion ;  the  remaining  companies  the  left  icing. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  "two  ranks  ; 
and  each  company  will  be  formed  into  two  ranks,  in 
the  following  manner :  the  corporals  will  be  posted  in 
the  front  rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left  of  platoons, 
.according  to  height;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the  tall- 
est man  will  form  the  first  file,  the  next  two  tallest 
men  wilfform  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file, 
which  will  be  composed  of  1J|e  shortest  corporal  and 
the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  o*dd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two, 
in  the  company,  from  right  to  left,  will  form  groups 
of  four  men,  who  will  be  designated  comrades  in  bat- 
tle. 

10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will 
be  thirteen  inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of  the 
rear  rank  men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  front 
rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  battalion 
will  always  be  equalized,  by  transferring  men  from 
the  strongest  to  the  weakest  companies. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION.  7- 

Posts  of  Company   Officers,   Sergeants   and 
Corporals. 

12.  The  company  officers,and  sergeants  are  nine  in 
number,  and  will  be  posted  in  the  following  manner : 

13.  The  captain  ou  the  right  of  the  company, 
touching  with  the  left  elbow. 

14.  The  first  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  touching 
with  the  left  elbow,  and  covering  captain. '  In  the 
manoeuvres  he  will  be  denominated  covering  sergeant, 
or  right  guide  of  the  company. 

15.  The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  will  be 
posted  as  file  closers,  and  two  paces  behind  the  rear 
rank. 

16.  The  first  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
fourth  section. 

17.  The  second  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of 
the  first  platoon.  . 

18.  The  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of 
the  second  platoon. 

19.  The  second- sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  left  of  the  company.  In  the  manoeuvres  he 
will  be*  designated  left  guide  of  the  company. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  right  of  the  secon&platoon. 

21.  The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

22.  The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the.  second  file 
from  the  right  of  the  first  platoon, 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  battalion, 
tiic  second  sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank, 
and  on  the  left  of  the  battalion. 


4> 

8  FORMATION  QF  THE  BATTALION. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the.front  rank, 
as  prescribed  No.  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — 
officers  by  sergeants,  and  sergeants  by  corporals. 
The  colonel  may  detach  a  first  lieutenant  from  one  com- 
pany to  command  another,  of  which  both  the  captain 
and  first  lieutenant  are  absent;  but  this  authority 
will  give  no  right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  so 
detached. 


Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

.26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel, 
and  major,  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on  active 
service  shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adjutant,  when 
the  battalion  is  manoeuvring,  will  be  on  foot. 

27.  The  colonel'will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  file  closers,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
battalion.  This  distance  will  be  reduced  whenever 
there  is  a  reduction  in  the  front  of  the  battalion.  - 

28.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  be  op- 
posite the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings  respec- 
tively, and  twelve  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  oppo- 
site the  right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respectively, 
and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid  the 
lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  respectively,  in  the 
manoeuvres. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION.  9 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  latter  by  the  major.  If  all 
the  field  officers  be  absent,  the  senior  captain  will 
command  the  battalion  ;  but  if  either  be  present,  he 
will  not  call  the  senior  captain  to  act  as  field  officer, 
except  in  case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quartermaster,  surgeon,  and  other  staff 
officers,  in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and 
three  paces  in  his  rear. 

33.  The  quartermaster  sergeant,  on  a  line  with 
the  front  rank  of  the  field'  music,  and  two  paces  on 
the  right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 


34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks, 
and  posted  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers — 
the  left  opposite  the  centre  of  the  left  centre  company. 
The  senior  principal  musician  will  be  two  paces  in 
front  of  the  field  music,  and  the  other  two  paces  in 
the  reau. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be 
drawn  up  in  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  its  num- 
bers, sud  posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  music, 
having  one  of  the  principal  musicians  at  its  head. 

Color-guard. 

36.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  he  com- 
posed of  eight  corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left  of  the 
right  centre  company,  of  which  company,  for  the  time 
being,  the  guard  will  make  a  part. 

2* 


10  FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

37.  The  front  rank  will  bo  composed  of  a  sergeant, 
to  be  selected  by  the  colonel,  who  will  be  called,  for 
the  time,  color-bearer,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals, 
respectively,  on  his  right  and  left;  the  rear  rank  will 
be  composed  of  the  three  corporals  next  in  rank;  and 
the  three  remaining  corpurals  will'  be  posted  in  their 
rear  ;  and  on  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  left  guide  of 
the  color-company,  when  these  three  last  named  cor- 
porals are  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  will  be  immedi- 
ately on  their  left. 

38.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies 
present,  there  will  be  no  color-guard,  and  no  display 
of  colors,  except  it  may  be  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  be  se- 
lected from  those  most  distinguished  for  regularity 
and  precision,  as  well  in  their  positions  under  arms  as 
in  their  marching.  The  latter  advantage,  and  a  just 
carriage  of  the  person,  are  to  be  more  particularly 
sought  for  in  the  selection  of  the  color-bearer.  ■ 


General  Guides. 


40.  There  will  bo  two  general  guides  in  each  bat- 
talion, selected,  for  the  time,  by  the  colonel,  from 
among  the  sergeants,  (other  than  first  sergeants,)  the 
most  destinguished  for  carriage  under  arms,  aud  ac- 
curacy in  marching. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denomi- 
nated, in  the  manceuvers,  right  general  guide,  and  left 
general  guide,  and  bo  posted  in  tho  line  of  file  closers  ; 
the  first  in  rear  of  the  right,  and  the  second  in  rear 
of  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion. 


INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Article  Second. 
Instruction  of  the  Battalien* 

42.  Every  commanding  officer  is  responsible  for 
the  instruction  of  his  command.  He  will  assemble 
the  officers  together  for  theoretical  and  practical  in- 
struction as  often  as  he  may  judge  necessary,  and 
when  unable  to  attend  to  his  duty  in  person,  it  .will 
be  discharged  by  the-officer  next  in  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  theo- 
retical and  practical  instruction  of  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  and  the  adjutant  for  the  instruction  of 
the  non-commissioned  staff.  To  this  end,  they  will 
require  these  tactics  to  be  studied  and  recited  lesson 
by  lesson;  and  when  instruction  is  given  on  the 
ground,  each  non-commissioned  officer,  as  he  explains 
a  movement,  should  be  required  to  put  it  into  practi- 
cal operation. 

44.  The  non-commissioned  officers  should  also  be 
practiced  in  giving  commands.  Each  command,  in  a 
lesson,  at  the  theoretical  instruction,  should  first  be 
given  by  the  instructor,  and  then  repeated,  in  succes- 
sion, by  the  non-commissioned  officers,  so  that  while 
they  become  habituated  to  the  commands,  uniformity 
may  be  established  in  the  manner  of  giving  them. 

45.  In  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company  officers 
will  be  the  instructors  of  the  squads  ;  but  if  there  be 
not  a  sufficient  number  of  company  officers  present, 
intelligent  sergeants  may  be  substituted;  and  two  or 


12  INSTRUCTION  OF  THE   BATTALION. 

three  squads,  under  'sergeant  instructors,  be  superin- 
tended, at  the  .same  time,  by  an  officer. 

< 

46.  In  the  school  of  the  company,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  the  major,  under  the  colonel,  will  be  the 
principal  instructors,  substituting  frequently  the  cap- 
tain of  the  company,  and  sometimes  one  of  the  lieu- 
tenants ;  the  substitute,  as  far  as  practicable,  being 
superintended  by  one  of  the  principals. 

47.  In  the  school  of  the  battalion,  the  brigadier  gen- 
eral may  constitute  himself  the  principal  instructor, 
frequently  substituting  the  colonel  of  the  battalion, 
sometimes  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  major,  and  twice 
or  thrice,  in  the  same  course  of  instruction,  each  of 
the  three  senior  captains.  In  this  school,  also,  the 
substitute  will  always,  if  practicable,  be  superintend- 
ed by  the  brigadier  general  or  the  colonel,  or  (in  case 
of  a  captain  being  the  instructor,)  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel  or  major. 

48.  Individual  instruction  being  the  basis  of  the  in- 
struction of  companies,  on  which  that  of  the  regiment 
depends,  and  the  first  principles  having  the  greatest 
influence  upon  this  individual  instruction,  classes  of 
recruits  should  be  watched  with  the  greatest  care. 

49.  Instructors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and  pre- 
cise words,  the  movement  to  be  executed;  and  not  to 
overburden  the  memory  of  the  men,  they  will  always 
use  the  same  terms  to  explain  the  same  principles.    , 

f>0.  They  should  often  join   example  to  precept, 
should  keep  up  the  attention  of  the  men  by  an  anima- 
ted  tone,  and  pass   rapidly  from  one  movement  to 
another,   as  soon  as  that  whieh   they  command  has 
'  been  executed  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 


INSTRUCTION  OF   THE   BATTALION.  13 

51.  The  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed  when  required 
to  be  used,  either  for  attack  or  defence;  the  exer- 
cises or  manoeuvres  will  be  executed  without  the 
bayonet. 

52.  In  the  movements  which  require  the  bayonet  to 
be  fixed,  the  chief  of  the  battalion  will  cause  the  sig- 
nal to  fix  bayonet  to  be  sounded  ;  at  this  signal  the 
men  will  fix  bayonet  without  command,  and  imme- 
diately replace  their  pieces  in  the  position  they  were 
before  the  signal. 


Instruction  of  Officers.^ 


53.  The  instruction  of  officers  can  be  perfected  only 
by  joining  theory  to  practice.  The  colonel  will  often 
practice  them  in  marching  and  in  estimating  distan- 
ces, and  he  will  carefully  endeavor  to  cause  them  to 
take  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness.  They  will 
iilso  be  exercised  in  the  double  quick  step. 

54.  The  instruction  of  officers  will  include  all  the 
Titles  in  this  system  of  drill,  and  such  regulations  as 
prescribe  their  duties  in  peace  and  war. 

55.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly  ac- 
quainted with  the  bugle  signals  ;  and  should,  by  prac- 
tice, be  enabled,  if  necessary,  to  sound  them.  This 
knowledge,  so 'necessary  in  geueral  instruction,  be- 
comes of  vital  importance  on  actual  service  in  the 
field. 


INSTRUCTION   OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Instruction  of  Sergeants. 

56.  As  the  discipline  and  efficiency  of  a  company 
materially  depend  on  the  conduct  and  character  of 
its  sergeants,  they  should  be  selected  with  care,  and 
properly  instructed  in  all  the  duties  appertaining  to 
their  rank. 

57.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Company,  and 
the  Drill  for  Skirmishers.  They  should  likewise  know 
all  the  details  of  service,  and  the  regulations  pre- 
scribing their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

58.  The  captain  selects  from  the  corporals  in  his 
company  those  whom  he  judges  fit  to  be  admitted  to 
the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  sergeants. 


Instruction   of  Corporals. 

59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  and  such  regulations  as  pre- 
scribe their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

60.  The  captain  selects  from  his  company  a  few 
privates,  who  may  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  in- 
struction of  the  corporals. 

61.  As  the  instruction  of  sergeants  and  corporals 
is  intended  principally  to  qualify  them  for  the  instruc- 
tion of  the  privates,  they  should  be  taught  not  only  to 
execute,  but  to  explain  intelligibly  every  thing  they 
may  be  required  to  teach. 


INSTRUCTION  OF   THE  BATTALION. 


Commands. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

62.  The  command  caution,  which' is  attention. 

G'.  The  preparatory  command,  which  indicates  the 
movement  which  is  to  be  executed.  | 

64.  The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march  or 
halt,  or,  in  the  manual  of  arms,  the  part  of  command 
which  causes  an  execution. 

65.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated',  dis- 
tinct, and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the"  number  of 
men  under  instruction. 

C}Q.  The  command  attention  is  pronounced  at  the 
top  of  the  voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 

67.  The  command  of  execution  will  be  pronounced 
in  a  tone  firm  and  brief. 

68.  The  commands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory 
commands  are  h#rein  distinguished  by  italics,  those 
of  execution  by  capitals. 

69.  Those  preparatory  commands  which,  from  their 
length,  are  difficult  to  be  pronounced  atone'e,  must  be 
divided  into  two  or  three  parts,  with  an  ascending 
progression  in  the  tone  of  command,  but  always  in 
such  a  manner  that  the  tone  of  execution  maybe  more 
energetic  and  elevated;  the  divisions  are  indicated  by 
a  hyphen.  The  parts  of  command  which  are  placed 
in  a  parenthesis,  are  not  pronounced. 


TITLE     SECOND. 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    SOLDIER. 

General    Rules  and   Divisions    of  the    School  of  the 
Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  individual 
and  progressive  instruction  of  the  recruits,  the  in- 
structor never  requires  a  movement  to  be  executed 
until  he  has  given  an  exact  explanation  of  it;  and  he 
executes,  himself,  the  movement  which  he  commands, 
so  as  to  join  example  to  precept.  He  accustoms  the 
recruit  to  take,  by  himself,  the  position  which  is  ex- 
plained— teaches  him  to  rectify  it  only  when  required 
by  his  want  of  intelligence — and  sees  that  all  the 
movements  are  performed  without  precipitation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before 
passing  to  another.  After  they  have  been  properly 
executed  in  the  order  laid  down  in  each  lesson,  the 
instructor  no  longer  confines  himself  to  that  order ; 
on  the  contrary,  he  should  change  it,  that  he  may 
judge  of  the  intelligence  of  the  men. 

72.  The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the 
end  of  each  part  of  the  lesson,  and  oftener,  if  he 
thinks  proper,  especially  at  the  commencement ;  for 
tkis  purpose  he  commands  Rest. 

73.  At  the  command  Rest,  the  soldier  is  no  longer 
required  to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  his 
place.  If  the  instructor  wishes  merely  to  relieve  the 
attention  of  the  recruit,  he  commands,  in  place— 
Rest;  the  soldier  is  then  not  required  to  preserve  his 

(10) 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I.  17 

immobility,  but  he  always  keeps  one  of  his  feet  in  its 
place. 

74.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the 
instruction,  he  commands — Attention;  at  this  com- 
mand, the  soldier  takes  his  position,  remains  motion-, 
less,  and  fixes  his  attention. 

75.  The  School  of  the  Soldier  will  bo  divided  into 
three  parts;  the  first,  comprehending  what  ought  to 
be  taught  to  recruit!'!:  without  arms  ;  the  second,  the 
manual  of  arms,  the  loadings  and  firings ;  the  third, 
the  principles  of  alignment,  the  march  by  the  front, 
the  different  steps,  the  march  by  the  flank,  the  princi. 
pies  of  wheeling,  and  those  of^ change  of  direction  ; 
also,  long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

76.  Each  part  will  be  divided  into  lessons,  as  fol- 
lows : 


PART  FIRST. 

Lesson  1.  Position  of  the    soldier  without  arms  ; 
Eyes  right,  Left  and  front. 
'  Lesson  2.  Facings. 

Lesson  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common 
and  quick  time. 

Lcssoii  4.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  double 
quick  time  and  the  run. 


PART   SECOND. 

Lesson  I.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  2.  Manual  of  arms.  m 

Lesson  3.  To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will. 


18      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I. 

Lesson  4.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file,  and 'by 
rank. 

Lesson  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 

Lesson  6.  Bayonet  exercise. 

PART  THIRD. 

_  Lesson  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for  instruc- 
tion in  the  principles  of  the  alignment. 

Lesson  2.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  march, 
and  the  different  steps. 

Lesson  3.  The  march  by  the  flank. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  wheeling  and  change  of  di- 
rection. 

Lesson  5.  Long  marches  in  double  quick  time,  and 
the  run,  with  arms  and  knapsacks. 

PART  FIRST.      , 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one  re- 
cruit at  a  time ;  but  three  or  four  may  be  united, 
when  the  number  be  great  compared  with  that  of  the 
instructors.  In  this  case,  the  recruits  will  be  placed 
in  a  single  rank,  at  one  pace  from  each  other.  In 
this  part,  the  recruits  will  be  without  arms. 

Lesson  I. 

Position  of  the  Soldier. 

"78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as 
the  conformation  of  the  man  will  permit ; 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  each 
other  something  less  than  a  right  angle  ; 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I.      19 

The  knees  straight  without  stiffness  ; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  for- 
ward ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally ; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally  ; 

The  elbows  near  the  body ; 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front ; 
the  little  finger  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons ; 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without 
constraint; 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  and  striking 
the  ground  about  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 

Remarks  on  the  Position  of  the  Soldier. 

Heels  on  the  same  line; 

79.  Because,  if  one  were  in  the  rear  of  the  other, 
the  shoulder  on  that  side  would  be  thrown  back,  or 
the  position  of  the  soldier  would  be  constrained. 

Heels  more  or  less  closed; 

Because,  men  who  are  knock  kneed,  or  who  have 
legs  with  large  calves,  cannot,  without  constraint, 
make  their  heels  touch  while  standing. 

The  feet  equally  turned  out,  and  not  forming  too  large 

an  angle; 

Because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more  than  the 
other,  a  shoulder  would  be  deranged,  and  if  both  feet 


20      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I. 

be  too  much  turned  out,  it  would  not  be  practicable 
to  inclinelhe  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  without 
rendering  the  whole  position  unsteady. 

Knees  extended  icithout  stiffness ; 

Because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue  would 
be  unavoidable. 


The  body  erect  on  the  hips; 

Because,  it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The 
instructor  "*will  observe  that  many  recruits  have  the 
bad  habit  of  dropping  a  shoulder,  of  drawing  In  a  side, 
or  of  advancing  a  hip,  particularly  the  right,  when 
under  arms.  These  are  defects-he  will  labor  to  correct. 


The  tipper  part  of  the  body  inclining  forward ; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposed  to  do  the 
reverse,  to  project  the  belly,  and  to  throw  back  the 
shoulders,  when  they  wish  to  hold  themselves  erect, 
from  which  result  great  inconveniences  in  marching. 
The  habit  of  inclining  forward  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  is  so  important  to  contract,  that  the  instructor 
must  enforce  it  at  the  beginning,  particularly  with 
recruits  who  have  naturally  the  opposite  habit. 

Shoulders  square; 

Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the 
line  of  the  breast,  and  the  back  arched  (the  defect 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I.  21 

called  round  shouldered,  not  uncommon  among  re- 
cruits,) the  man  cannot  align  himself,  nor  use  his 
piece  with  address.  It  is  important,  then,  to  correct 
this  defect,  and  necessary  to  that  end  that'  the  coat 
should  set  easy  about  the  shoulders  and  arm-pits  ;  but 
in  correcting  this  defect,  the  instructor  will  take  care 
that  the  shoulders  be  not  thrown  too  much  to  the 
rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to  project,  and  the 
small  of  the  back  to  be  curved. 


The  arms  hanging  naturally,  elbows  near  the  body,  the 
palm  of  the  hand  a  little  turned  to  the  front,  the  little 
finger  behind  the  scam  of  the  jyantaloons  ; 

Because,  these  positions  are  equally  important  to 
the  shoulder-arms,  and  to  prevent  the  man  from  oc- 
cupying more  space  in  rank  than  is  necessary  to  a 
free  use  of  the  piece  ;  they  have,  moreover,  the  ad- 
vantage of  keeping  in  the  shoulders. 

The  face  straight  to  the  front,  and  icithout  restraint; 

Because,  if  there  be  stiffness  in  the  latter  position, 
it  would  comuiunicate  itself  to  the  whole  of  the  up 
per  part  of  the  body,  embarrass  its  movements,  and 
give  pain  and  fatigue. 

Eyes  direct  to  the  front ; 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  means  of  maintaining 
the  shoulders  in  line — an  essential  object,  to  be  in- 
sisted ou  and  attained. 


22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I. 

80.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the 
position  of  the  soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach 
him  the  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes.  He  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Byes— Right.     2.  Front. 

81.  At  tho  word  right,  the  recruit  will  turn  the 
head  gently,  so  as  to  bring  the  inner  comer  of  the  left 
eyo  in  a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat,  the  eyes 
fixed  on  a  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed 
to  be  in,  the  same  rank. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  resume 
the  direct  or  habitual  position. 

83.  The  movement  of  Eyes — Left  will  be  execu- 
ted by  inverse  means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that 
tho  movement  of  the  head  does  not  derange  the 
scpiareness  of  the  shoulders,  which  will  happen  if  the 
movement  of  the  former  be  too  sudden. 

85/  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  recruit  to 
pass  from  the  state  of  attention  to  that  of  ease,  he 
wUl  command :  , 

Rest. 

86.  To -cause  a  resumption  of  the  habitual  position, 
tho  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.    2.  Squad. 

87.  At  the  first  word,  tho  recruit  will  fix  his  atten- 
tion :  at  the  second,  he  will  resume  the  prescribed 

position  and  steadiness. 


t   SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  t  23 

Lesson  II. 

Facings. 

83.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed  in 
one  time,  or  pause.     The  instructor  will  command : 

].  Squad.     2.  Right  (or  left)— FACE. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  right  foot 
slightly,  turn  on  the  left  heel,  raising  the  toes  a  little, 
and  then  replace  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left, 
and  on  the  same  line. 

90.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front)  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  two  times,  or  pauses.  The  instructor  will 
command : 

1".  Squad.    2.  About — Face. 

01.  (First  time.)  At  the  word  about,  the  recruit 
will  turn  on  the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toa  to  the 
front,  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  op- 
posite to,  and  full  three  inches  from,  the  left  heel,  the 
feet  square  to  each  other. 

92.  (Second  time.)  At  the  word  face,  the  recruit 
will  turn  on  both  heels,  raise  the  toe 8  a  little,  extend 
the  hams,  face  to  the  rear,  bringing,  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

_  93.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  these  mo- 
tions do  not  derange  the  position  of  the  body. 


24  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  1. 

« 

Lesson  III. 
Prhiciples  of  the  Direct  Step. 

94.  The  length  of  the  direct  step,  or  pace  in  com- 
mon time,  will  be  twenty-eight  inches,  reckoning  from 
heel  to  heel,  and  in  swiftness,  at  the  rate  of  ninety  in 
a  minute. 

95.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed  in 
his  position,  will  explain  to  him  the  principle  and 
mechanism  of  this  step — placing  himself  six  or  seven 
paces  from,  and  facing  to,  the  recruit.  He  will  him- 
self execute  slowly  the  step  in  the  way  of  illustration, 
and  then  command : 

J .  Squad,  forward,  2.   Common  time. 

3.  March. 

96.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw 
the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  right  leg  without  bend- 
ing the  left  knee. 

97.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but 
without  a  jerk,  carry  straight  forward  the  left  foot 
twenty-eight  inches  from  the  right,  the  sole  near  the 
ground,  the  ham  extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed, 
and,  as  also  the  knee,  slightly  turned  out ;  he  will,  at 
the  same  time,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  forward, 
and  plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at 
the  distance  where  it  finds  itself  from  the  right  when 
the  weight  of.  the  body  is  brought  forward,  the  whole 
of  which  will  now  rest  on  the  advanced  foot.  The  re- 
cruit will  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right  foot 
and  plant  it  as  above,  the  heel  twenty-eight  inches 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I.  25 

from  the  heel  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to 
march  without  crossing  the  legs,  or  striking  the  one 
against  the  other,  without  turning  the.  shoulders,  and 
preserving  always  the  face  direct  to  the  front. 

93.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
march,  he  will-command  : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

99.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the 
ground,  the  foot  in  the  rear  will  be  brought  up,  and 
planted  by  the  side  of  the  other  without  shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  indicate, .  from  time  to 
time,  to  the  recruit,  the  cadence  of  the  step  by  giving 
the  command  one  at  the  inst.nnt  of  raising  a  foot,  and 
two  at  the  instant  it  ought  to  be  planted,  observing 
the  cadence  of  ninety  steps  in  a  minute.  This  me- 
thod will  contribute  greatly  to  impress  upon  the 
mind  the  two  motions  into  which  the  step  is  natu- 
rally divided. 

101.  Common  time  will  be  employed  only  in  the 
first  and  second  parts  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 
As  soon  as  the  recruit  has  acquired  steadiness,  has 
become  established  in  the  principles  of  shouldered 
arms,  and  in  the  mechanism,  length  and  swiftness  of 
the  step  iy  common  time,  he  will  be  practiced  only 
in  quick  time,  the  double  quick  time,  and  the  run. 

102.  The  principles  of  the  step 'in  quick  time  are 
the  same  as  for  common  time,  but  its  swiftness  is  at 
the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per  minute. 

3* 


SCHOOL  OF  TILE  SOLDI BR— PART  I. 


103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in 
quick  .time,  will  Command : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  Marcu. 


Lesson  IV. 

Principles  of  the  Double  Quick  Step. 

104.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  step  is  thirty- 
three  inches,  audits  swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one  hun- 
dred and  sixty-five  steps  per  miuute. 

105.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  recruits 
the  principles  and  mechanism  of  the  double  quick 
step,  will  command : 

1.  Double  quick  step.    2.  March. 

106.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  raise 
his  hands  to  a  level  with  his  hips,  the  hands  closed, 
the  nails  towards  the  body,  the  elbows  to  the  rear. 

107..  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the 
front  his  left  leg  bent,  in. order  to  give  to  the  knee  the 
greatest  elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  between  the 
knee  and  the  instep  vertical,  the  toe  depressed ;  he  will 
then  replace  his  foot  in  its  former  position ;  with  the 
right  leg  he  will  execute  what  has  just  been  pro- 
scribed for  the  left,  and  the  alternate  movement  of 
the  legs  will  be  continued  until  the  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE'  SOLDIER— PART  I.      27 

3.  Squad.    2   Halt. 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will 
bring  the  foot  which  is  raised  by  the  side  of  the 
other,  and  dropping  at  the  same  time  his  hands  by 
bis  side,  will  resume  the  position  of  the  soldier 
without  arms. 

109.  The  instrucjtor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight 
paces  from,  and  facing  the  recruit,  will  indicate  the 
cadence  by  the  commands,  one  and  tico,  given  alter- 
nately at  the  instant  each  foot  should  be  brought  to 
the  ground,  which  at  first  will  be  in  common  time, 
but  its  rapidity  will  be  gradually  augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  in 
tbe  principles  of  this  step,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Squad  forioard.     2.  Double  quick. 

3.  March. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw 
the  weight  of  his  body,  on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  place  his 
arms  as  indicated,  N0JIO6. 

113.  At  the  third  command,  he  .will  carry  forward 
the  left  foot,  the  leg  slightly  bent,  the  knee  some- 
what raised— will  plant  his  loft  foot,  the  toe  first, 
thirty-three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with  the  right 
foot  will  then  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
tor  the  ieft.  This  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will 
take  phice  by  throwing  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the 
foot  that  is  planted,  and  by  allowing  a  natural  oscil- 
latory motion  to  the  arms. 


2b      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

114.  The  double  quirk  step  may  be  executed  with 
different  degrees  of  Bwiftjiess.  Under  urgent  cir- 
cumstances the  cadence'  of  this  Btep  may  be  iucreased 

to  one  hundred  and  eighty  per  minute.  At  this  rate 
a  distance  of  four  thousand  yards  would  bo  passed 
over  iu  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

115..  The  recruits  will  be  exercised  also  in  running. 

116.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double 
quick  step,  the  only  difference  consisting  in  a  greater 
degree  of  swiftness. 

137  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double 
quick  time  or  the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe 
as  much  as  possible  through  the  nose,  keeping  the 
mouth  closed.  Experience  has  proved  that,  by  con- 
forming to  this  principle,  a  man  can  pass  over  a  much 
longer  distance  and  with  less  fatigue. 


PART   SECOND. 


GENERAL  RULES. 

118.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this 
second  part  until  they  shall  be  well  established  iu  the 
position  of  the  body,  and  in  the  manner  of  marching 
at  the  different  steps. 

119.  He  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  ho  will 
place  in  the  same  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  instruct 
them  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arms  as  follows: 


I 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II  & 

LESSOR  I. 
PrincijyJcs  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

120.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained- in  the 
first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  the  instructor  will  cause 
him  to  bond  the  right  arm  slightly,  and  place  the 
piece  in  it,  in  the  following  manner: 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand— the  barrel  near- 
ly vertical  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder 
—the  guard  to  the  front, "the  arm  hanging  nearly  at 
its  full  length  near  the  body  ;  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger embracing  the  guard,  the  remaining  fingers 
closed  together,  and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock 
just  under  the  cock,  which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

122.  Recruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural  de- 
fects in  the  conformation  of  the  shoulders,  breast  and 
hips.  These  the  instructor  will  labor  to  correct  in 
the  lessons  without  arms,  and  afterwards,  by  steady 
endeavors,  so  that  the  appearance  of  the  pieces,  in 
the  same  line  may  be  uniform,  and  this  without  con- 
straint to  the  men  in  their  positions. 

123.  The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  remark 
that  recruits,  on  first  bearing  arms,  are  liable  to  de- 
range their  position  by  lowering  the  right  shoulder 

.and  the  right  baud,  or  by  sinking  .the  hip  and  spread- 
ing out  the  elbows. 

124.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults 
by  continually  rectifying  the  position  ;  he  will  some- 
times take  away  the  piece  to  replace  it  the  better  ;  he 


30      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER -PART  II. 

will  avoid  fatiguing  the  recruits  too  much  in  the  be- 
ginning,  but  labor  by  degrees  to  render  this  posifton 

so  natural  and  easy  that  tl  main  in  it  a  lung 

time  without  fatigue. 

125.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  groat  care 
that  the  piece  at  the  shoulder,  be  not  carried  too  high 
nor  too  low;  if  too  high,  the  right  elhow  would  spread 

out,  the  soldier  would  occupy  too  much  space  in  his 
rank,  and  the  piece  be  mam  to  waver;  if*  too  low,  ■ 
the  files  would  be  too  much  closed*  the  Boldier  would 
not  have  the  necessary  space  to  handle  his  piece  with 
facility,  the  right  arm  would  become  too  much  fa- 
tigued, and  would  draw  down  the  shoulder. 

126.  The  instructor,  before  passing  to  the  second 
lesson,  will  cause  to  be   repeated  the  movements  of 

•  eyes  right,  left,  and  front,  and  the  facings. 

LESSON  II. 
Manual  of  Arms. 

127.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  four 
men,  placed,  at  first,  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow^and 
afterwards  in  two  ranks. 

128.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time, 
(or  pause,)  but  this  time  will  be  divided  into- motions, 
the  better  to  make  known  the  mechanism. 

129.  The  rate  (or  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in  febe 
manual  of  arms,  with  the  exception  herein  indicated, 
is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute  ;  but,  in  or- 
der hot  to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  instructor  will, 
at  first,  look  more  particularly  to  the  execution  of 
the  motions,  without  requiring  a  nice  observance  ot 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PAR*  I!.  31 

the  cadence,  to  which  he  will  bring  the  recutita  pro- 
gressively, acid  after  they  Bhall  have  become  a  little 
familiarized  with  the  handling 'of  the  piece. 

130.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to 
the  rammer,  and  to  the  fixing  and  unfixing  of  the  bay- 
onet, cannot  be  e  the  rate  prescribed,  nor 
even  with  a  uniform  swiftness,  they  will  not  he  sub- 
jected to  that  cadence.  The  instructor  will,  hov 
er,  labor  to  cause  these  motions  to  be  executed  with 
promptness,  and,  above  all,  with  regularity. 

131.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  decide 
the  brisk  execution  of  the  first  motion  of  each  time 
(or  pause. )  The  commands  tw»,  three,  and  four,  will 
decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the  other  motions.  As 
soon  as  the  recruits  shall  well  comprehend  the  posi- 
tions of  the  several  motions  of  a  time,  they  will  be 
taught  to  execute  the  time  without  resting  on  its  dif- 
ferent motions  ;  the  mechanism  of  ttie  time  will  nev- 
ertheless be  observed,  as  well  to  give  a  perfect  use  of 
the  piece,  as  to  avoid  the  sinking  of,  or  slurring  over, 
either  of  th'e  motions.  — 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  fo£  ^ 
lowing  progression  :    The  instructor  will  command  : 


Support — Amis. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

L33.  ( First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  perpendicularly  to  the  front,  and  between  the 
eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear;  seize  the  piece  with  the 


32  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  raise  this  hand  as  high 
as  tire  chin,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with 
the  right  hand  four  inches- below  the  cock. 

134.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  carry  the  piece  to 
the  left  shoulder,  and  pass  the  fore-arm  extended  on 
the  breast  between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock  ; 
support  the  cock  against  the  left  fore-arm,  the  left 
hand  resting  on  the  right  breast. 

135.  (Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the 
side. 

136.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose 
in  this  position,  he  will  command: 


Rest. 

137.  At  this  command  the  recruits  will  bring  up 
smartly  the  right  hand  to  the   handle  of  the  piece 

^small  of  the  stock,)  when  they  will  not  be  required 
to  preserve  silence,  or  steadiness  of  position. 

138.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits 
to  pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  stead- 
iness,, he  will  command : 


1.  Attention.     2.  SQUAD. 

130,  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume 
the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  support  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER- PART  II.  33 

•  -     Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

140.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  tho  piece  with  the 
right  hand  under  and  against  the  left  fore-arm  ;  seize 
it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb 
extended  ;  detach  fhe  piece  slightly  from  the  shoulder, 
the  left  fore-arm  along  the  stock. 

141.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  vertically 
to  the  right  shoulder  with  both  hands,  the  rammer  to 
tho  front,  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  as 
to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger, 
slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight- 

142.  (Third  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Present — Arms. 
„.  One  time  and  two  motions. 

143.  (First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring 
the  piece  erect  before  the  centre  jjf  the  body,  the 
rammer  to  the  front;  at; the  same  time  seize  the 
piece  with  the  left  hand  half-way  between  the  guide 
sight  and  lower  baud;  the  thumb  extended  along  the 
barrel  and  against  the  stock,  the  fore-arm  horizontal 
and  resting  agaiust  the  body,  the  hand  as  high  as  the 
elbow  J 

.144.  (Second  motion.)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock 
with  the  right  hand  below  and  against  the  guard. 


34      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IF. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

145.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  change  the  position  ef  the 
right  band  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the 
thumb  and  forefinger,  slip  up  the  left  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  join- 
ed, the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

14(>.  {Second  mution.)  Drop  the  left  baud  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Order — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

147.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with 
the  left  hand  near  the  upper  baud,  and  detach  it 
slightly  from  the  shoulder  w^th  the  right  hand  ;  loosen 
the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,'  lower  the  piece  with  the 
left,  re-seize  the  piece  with  the  right  band  above  the 
lower  band,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the 
butt  about  four  inches  from  the  ground,  the  right  hand 
supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand  by  the 
side. 

148.  (Second  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through 
the  right  hand  to  the  ground  "by  opening  slightly  the 
fingers,  and  take  the  position  about  to  bo  described. 

Position  of  Order  Arms. 

140.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  extended  along  the  stock ;  the  other 


'      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-FART  II,  35 

fingers  extended  and  joined ;  the  muzzle  about  two 
inches  from  the  right  shoulder  ;  the  "rammer  in  front; 
the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the  butt,  against,  and  m  a  line 
with  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  the  barrel  perpendi- 
cular. .  ,   , 

150.  When  the  instructor  may  wi.4i  to  give  repose 
in  this  position,  he  will  •command : 

Rest. 

151.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness. 

152.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to 
''pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadi- 
ness, he  will  command: 

1.  Attention.    2.  Squad. 

15:3.  At  the  second  word  the  recruits  will  resume 
the  position  of  order  arms. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 

154.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  vertically 
with  the  right  hand  to  the  height  of  the  left  breast, 
and  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  close  to  the 
body;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  the 
right,  and  drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the 
piece  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger embracing  the  guard;  press  the  piece  against 
the  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight. 


36      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

155.  (Second  motion,)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  tbe  side. 

Load  in  nine  times. 
1.  Load.* 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

156.  (First  motion.)  Same  as  first  position  of  pre- 
sent firms,  No.  143. 

(Second  motion.)  Carry,  tbe.  piece  to  the  left 
with  the  left  baud — butt-  upon  the  ground — barrel  to 
the  front — piece  inclined  to  the  right  and  front  rest- 
ing along  the  left  thigh,  muzzle  six  inches  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  body — right  hand  grasping  the  piece 
just  below  the  upper  baud,  and  the  left  hand  extend- 
ing upon  the  piece. 

(Third  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
at  ,the  muzzle  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  car- 
tridge box. 

2.  Handle— Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion.    • 

157.  Seize  tbe  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next 
two  fingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  -Tear— Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

158.  Tear  the'  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  car- 
tridge upright  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fin- 
gers, near  the  top ;  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of 
and  near  the  muzzle— the  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
front. 


*  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to 

instructor  will  cause  the  cartridge  boxes  to  be  brought  to  the 
front. 


16 


P5 


SCHOOL  OF  TBE  SOLDIER-PART  II.  37 

4.  Charge— CARTRIDGE.. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

159.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel;  .disen- 
gage the  ball  from  the  paper  with  the  right  hand  and. 
the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left ;  insert  it 
into  the  bore,  the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press 
it  down  with  the  right  thumb,  seize  the  head,  of  the 
rammer  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right 
hand,  the  other  fingers  closed,  the  elbows  near  the 
body. 

5.  Draw— Rammer. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

160.  {First  motion.)  Half  draw  the  rammer  by 
extending  the  right  arm;  steady  it  in  this 'position 
with  the  left  thumb  ;  seize  the  rammer  between  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  thumb 
under  the  finger  over  the  rammer;  fingers  extended, 
palm  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

161.  {Second  motion.)  Clear  the  rammer  from  the 
pipes  by  extending  the  arm  ;  the  rammer  in  prolon- 
gation of  the  pipes,  palm  of  the  had  to  the  front. 

162  {Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer  by  closing 
the  fingers,  the  little  end  passing  near  the  left  shoul- 
der, turning  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front :  steady 
it  by  extending  the  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand  ; 
place  the  headof  the  rammer  on  the  ball,  the  rammer 
in  prolongation  of  the  barrel. 

6.  Ram — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and 
Stea'dy  it  in  this  position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left 


38  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II, 

hand ;  .seize  the  rammer  at  the  small  eud  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  back  of 
the  hatid  to  the  front;  press  the  ball  home,  the  elbows 
near  the  body. 


7.  Return — RAMMER. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

164.  (First  motion.). Draw  the  rammer  half-way 
out,  and  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb; 
grasp  it  near  the  muzzle  with  the  Tight  hand,  the 
thumb  under,  and' the  fore-finger  above  the  rammer, 
the  fingers  extended  ;  clear  the  rammer  from  the  bore 
by  extending  the  arm,  the  palm  to  the  front,  the  ram- 
mer in  the  prolongation  of  the  barrel. 

166.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  head 
passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  the  fingers  closed,  the 
rammer  held  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger — 
nails  to  the  front ;  insert  tho  rammer,  until  the  hand 
reaches  the  muzzle. 

-  .366.  (Third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer'home  by 
placing  the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  on  the  head 
the  rammer;  extend  the  left  hand  down  the  piece 
without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

8.  Prime.* 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

367.  (First  motion.)  With  the  left  hand  raise  the 
piece  till  the  hand  is  as  high  as  the  eye,  grasp  the 

*  If  Maynard'a  primer  be  used,  the  command  will  be  load  in 


eCU  >0L  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II,  39 

sinall  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand  ;  half  face  to 
the  right;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  foot  be- 
hind and  at  right  angles  with  the  left;  the  hollow  of 
ight  foot  against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left  hand 
down .t<>  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  along  the  stock, 
the  left  elbow  against  the  body;  bring  the  piece  to 
the  right  side,  the  butt  below.the  right  fore-arm — the 
small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches 
below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  muz- 
zle on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

■'.  (Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb 
of  the  right  hand,  the  fingers  supported  againBt  the 
guard  and  the  small  of  the  stock — remove  the  old  can 
with  one  of  the  fingers  of  the  right,  hand,  and  wjtl 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap 
from  the  pouch,  place  it  on  the  nipph  <s  it 

down  with  the  thumb;  seize  the  small  of  the 
with  the  right  hand. 


9.  Shoulder— ARhs. 


One  time  and  two  motions. 

I 

169.  (First  motion.)     Bring  t;,  the  right 

shoulder  and  support  it  there  with  the  left  hand,  lace 


eight  times,  and  the  eighth  command  will  be,  shoulder  arms,  and 
executed  from  return  rammer,  iu'one  time  and  two  motions,  as 

follows  : 

(First  motion.)    Rr.ise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  take 

rition  of  shoulder  arms,  as  indicated,  No.  145.' 
(5  cond  motion.)    Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 


to  the;  front;  bring  the)  right  heel  to  the 

on  a  line  with  the  left;  grasp  the  piece  with  V 

hand  as  indicated  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms i 

]?(».  (Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Ready. 

One  time  and  three  motions.. 


171.  (First  motion.)     Raise  the  piece  slightly  with 

the  right  hand,  making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the 

left  heel;  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  and  place 

it  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite 

to,  and  against  the  left  heel;  grasp  the  piece  with  the 

left  hand  at  the  lower  band  and  detach  it  slightly  from 

the  shoulder. 
i 

172.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  left  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  stock,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore- 
arm, the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two 
inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  as  high  as 
the  eye,  the  left  elbow  against  the  side  ;  place  at  the 
same  time  the  right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  cock, 
the  other  fingers  under  and  against  the  guard. 

J7v>.  (  Third  motion.)  Cock,  and  seize  the  piece  at 
the  small  of  the  stock  without  deranging  the  position 
of  the  butt. 


4/ 


Pi 


1 


■ 


P    V 


i 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART 

Adi. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 


174.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support 
the  butt  against  the  right  shoulder ;  the  left  elbow 
down,  the  right  as  high  as  the  shoulder ;  incline  the 
head  upon  the  butt,  so  that  the  right  eye  may  perceive 
quickly,  the  notch  of  the  haussee,  the  front  sight,  and 
the  object  aimed  at;  the  left  eye  closed,  the  right 
thumb  extended  along"  the  stock,  the  forefinger  on 
the  trigger. 

175.  When  recruits  are  formed  in  two  ranks  to 
execute  the  firings,  the  front-  rank  men  will  raise  a 
little  less  the  right  elbow,  in  order  to  facilitate  the 
aim  of  the  rear  rank  men. 

176.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry 
the  right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  right,  ajid  to- 
wards the  left  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right,  in- 
clining the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward. 


Fire. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

177.  Press  the  fore-finger  against  the  trigger,  fire, 
without  lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in 
this  position. 

178.  Instructors  will  be  careful  to  observe  when 
the  men  fire,  that  they  aim  at  some  distinct  object  and. 
that  the  barrel  be  so  directed  that  the  line  of  fire  and 

4* 


42  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

the  line  of  sight  be  in  the  same  vertical  plane.  They 
will  often  cause  the  firing  to  be  executed  on  ground 
of  different  inclinations,  in  order  to  accustom  the  men 
to  fire  at  objects  either  above  or  below  them. 


Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

179.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the 
same  time  faco  to  the  front  and  take  the  position  of 
load  as  indicated  No.  156.  Each  rear  rank  man  will 
bring  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor 
will  cause  the  loading  to  be  continued  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  prescribed  No.  156  and  follow- 
ing. 

181.  If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish 
the  recruits  to  reload,  hp  will  command :  ■ 


Shoulder— ARMS. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

183.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand 
and  resume  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  at  tho  same 
time  face  to  the  front,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  and 
bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with  the  left. 

183.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  com- 
mand fire,  the  instructor ,  when  they  are  in  the  posi- 
tion of  aim,  will  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.  43 

Recover — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw 
the  finger  from  the  trigger ;  at  the  command'  arms, 
retake  the  position  of-  the  third  motion  of  ready. 

185.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third 
motion  of  ready,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring 
them  to  a  shoulder,  he  will  command  : 

Shoulder— Arms. 
One- time  and  one  motion. 

186.  At  the  command  shoulder,  place  the  thumb 
upon  the  cock,  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger,  half-cock, 
and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  with  the  right  hand. 
At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  tho  piece  briskly  to 
the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of  shoulder 
arms. 

187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will  command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  four  motions. 

188.  {First,  second  and  third  motions.}  Same  as  in 
first,  second  and  third  motions  in  the  first  time  of  load- 
ing except  in  the  third  motion  the  right  hand  is  car- 
ried to  the  bayonet,  grasping  it,  with  the  little  finger  up. 

189.  [Fourth  motion.}  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the 
scabbard,  fix  it,  seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at 


44      SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

the  muzzle,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the  barrel,  arm 
extended. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

190.  [First  motion.]  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  and  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  ram- 
mer to  the  front ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with 
the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  right  arm 
nearly  extended. 

191.  [Second  motion.']  Drop  briskly  the  left  hand 
by  the  side. 

192.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  if  the  in- 
structor should  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  ho  will  give  the 
command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

when  the  pieces  will  be  brought  to  the  left  side  at 
one  motion,  and  held  as  prescribed  in  No.  188.  At  the 
second  motion  the  bayonets  will  be  fixed  as  in  No. 
189 ;  immediately  resume  the  position  of  ordered 
arms. 

Charge — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

193.  [First  motion.]  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with 
the  right  hand  and  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on 
the  left  heel ;  place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  oppo- 
site to,  and  three  inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet 
square;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the 
left  hand  a  little  above  the  lower  band. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-PART  IL  45 

194.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow 
against  the  body ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the 
same  time,  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  sup- 
ported against  the  hip ;  the  point  of  the  bayonet  as 
high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

195.  (First  motion.)  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly 
with  the  left  hand  in  facing  to  the  front,  place  it  against 
the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  turn  the 
right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide  the  left 
hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  right  hand 
nearly  extended. 

196.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly 
by  the  side. 

Trail — Arms. 


One  time  and  two  motions. 

197.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the.first  motion 
of  order  arms. 

198.  (Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly 
to  the  front,  the  butt  to  the  rear  and  about  four  inches 
from  the  ground.  The  right  hand  supported  at  the 
hip,  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the  rear  raukmenmay 
not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  the  front 
rank. 


40  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II 

Shoulder — ARMS. 

199.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  per- 
pendicularly in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear 
of  the  barrel;  at  the  command  arms,  execute  what 
has  been  prescribed  for  the  shoulder  from  the  position 
of  order  arms. 

Unfix— Bayonet. 

One  time  and  four  motions. 

200.  (First  and  second  motion.)  Same  as  in  fix 
bayonet. 

201.  (Third  motimi.)  Same  as  in  fix  bayonet,  ex- 
cept turn  tho  bayonet  clasp  with  the  right  thumb, 
grasp  the  shank  of  the  bayonet  with  the  right  hand, 
palm  under  thumb  and  fingers  extended  well  at  the 
Wade  of  the  bayonet. 

202.  ( Fourth  motion.)  Wrench  off  the  bayonet,  re- 
turn it  to  the  scabbard,  grasp  the  piece  at  the  upper 
band  with  the  right  hand,  lower  the  left  hand  along 
the  barrel,  the  arm  extended  without  depressing  the 
shoulder. 


p  n 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER- PART  II.  47  •. 

Shoulder— ARMS. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

203.  (First  and  second  motions.)  Same  as  irotn/z 
baijonet  Nos.  190  and  191. 

Secure— Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

204.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion 
of  support  arms,  No.  133,  except  with  the  right  hand 
seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

205.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  bring  it  opposite  the 
left  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  hand  at 
the  lower  band,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and  ex- 
tended on  the  rammer ;  the  piece  erect  and  detached 
from  the  shoulder,  the  left  forearm  against  the  piece. 

* 

206.  (Third  motion.)    Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it  , 
under  the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining   at  the 
lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent  it 

'  from  sliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the 
hip,  the  right  hand  falliug  at  the  same  time  by  the 
side. 


48  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

Shoulder — ARMS. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

207.  (First  motion.)  Raise  tha.  riana  »*Es  +i,«  ua, 
hand, -and  seize,  it  wltli  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of 
the  stock.  The  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the 
shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  fore-arm 
along  the  piece. 

■  208.  (Second  motion.)    The  same  as  the  second  mo- 
tion of  shoulder  arms  from  a  support. 

209.  (Third  motion.)  The  same  as  the  third  mo- 
tion of  shoulder  arms  from  a  support. 

Right  shoulder  shift — ARMS. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

210.  (First  motion. )  Detach  the  piece  perpendicu- 
larly from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  seize 
it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  the  guide- 
sight,  raise  the  piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulder  and  four  inches  froiuftt ;  place  at  the 
same  time,  the  right  hand  on  the  butt,  the  beak  be- 
tween the  first  two  fingers,  the  other  two  fingors  un- 
der the  butt  plate. 

211.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  raise  and  place  the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand,  the  lock-plate  upwards  ;  let  fall, 
at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 


**fz 


«v^C 


Y** 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER-PART  II.  49 

Shoulder— Arms. 

4 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

viz.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  perpendicu- 
larly by  extending  the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the 
rammer  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  between  the  lower  band  and  guide 
sight. 

213.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right 
hand,  which  will  immediately  embrace  the  guard,  low- 
er the  piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  slide  up 
the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers 
extended  and  closed.    Urop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

214.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor 
will  sometimes  cause  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right 
shoulder."   To  this  effect  he  will  command : 


Right  shoulder  shift — A.RMS. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

215.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  below  and  near  the  left  fore-arm,  place  the  left 
hand  under  the  butt,  the  heel  of  the  butt  between 
the  first  two  fingers. 

216.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards,  carry  it  to  the  right 
shoulder,  the  left  hand  still  holding  the  butt,  the  muz- 
zle elevated ;  hoid  the  piece  in  this  position  and  place 
the  right  hand  upon  the  butt  as  is  prescribed,  No.  210, 
and  let  fall  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 


50  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-PART  II. 

Support — Armsv 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

217.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  uie  pro*  u*  +;-» 
of  shoulder  arms,  No.  212. 

218.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the.  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  carry  it  opposite  the 
left  shoulder,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the 
stock,  place  the  left  fore-arm  extended  on  the  breast, 
as  is  prescribed  No.  134,  and  let  fall  the  right  hand  by 
the  side. 

Arms— At  Will. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

219.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure 
on  either  shoulder,  with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muz- 
zle elevated. 

Shoulder — ARMS. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 


220.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms. 

221.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  the  pieces  to  be  placed 
on  the  ground,  ho  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  S<  'LDIER— PART  II,  51 

Ground — ARMS. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 


222.  (First  motion.)  Turn  tho  piece  with  the  right 
hand  the  barrej  to  tho  left,  at  the  same  time  seize  the 
cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  body,  ad- 
vance the  left  foot,  tho  heel  opposite  the  lower  band  ; 
lay  the  piece  on  the  ground  with  the  right  hand,  the 
too  of  the  button  a  line  with  tho  right  toe,  the  knees 
slightly  bent,  tho  right  heel  raised. 

223.  (Second  motion.)  Rise  up,  bring  the  left  foot 
by  the  side  of  tho  right,  quit  tho»  cartridge  box  with 
the  left  hand,  and  drop  the  hands  by  the  side. 


Raise — Arms. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 


22-4.  (First  motion.)  Seize  tho  cartridge  box  with 
the  left  hand,  bend  the  body,  advance  the  left  foot 
opposite  the  lower  band,  and  seize  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand. 

225.  (Second  motion.)  Raise  the  piece,  bringing 
the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right;  turn  the  piece 
with  the  right  hand,  the  rammer  to  the  front ;  at  the 
same  time  quit  the  cartridge  box  with'  the  left  hand, 
and  drop  this  hand  by  the  side. 


52      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

226.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  with  bay- 
onett  in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes  to  cause 
an  inspection  of  arms,  he  will  command : 


Inspection—  Arms. 
One  time  and  four  motions. 

(First  and  second  motions.)  Same  as  in  fix  bayonet* 
No.  192,  except  that  the  left  hand  remains  at  the 
muzzle,  and  the  rammer  head  is  seized  between  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger,  as  in  draw  rammer. 

227.  (Third  motion.)  Spring  rammer  as  prescribed 
in  loading;  lower  the  left  hand  along  the  piece  to  full 
extent  of  arm,  grasping  the  pi.ece  at  the  muzzle-band 
with  the  right  hand. 

228.  (Fourth  motion.)  Bring  the  piese  to  position 
of  order  arms. 

229.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession 
the  piece  of  each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the  front  of 
the  rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches  him,  will 
raise  smartly  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seize  it 
with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide-sight, 
the  lock  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the 
chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left  eye ;  the  instructor 
will  take  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  handle,  and, 
after  inspecting  it,  will  return  it  to  the  recruit,  who 
will  receive  it  back  with  the  right  hand,  and  replace 
it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.  53 

230«vWhen  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him, 
each  recruit  will  retake  the  position  prescribed  at  the 
command  inspection  arms,  return  the  rammer,  and 
resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

23 J.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  instruc- 
tor should  merely  wish.to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed, 
ho  will  command : 


Fix— Bayonet. 


232.  Take  the  position  indicated,  No.  102,  fix  bay- 
onets as  has  been  explained,  and  immediately  resume 
the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

233.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing, 
to  ascertain  whether  the  pieces  have  been  discharged, 
he  will  command  : 

Spring — Rammers. 

234.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel,  as  has  been 
explained  above,  and  immediately  retake  the  position 
of  ordered  arms. 

235.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can 
take  the  rammer  by  tho  small  end  and  spring  it  in  the 
barrel,  or  cause  each  recruit  to  make  it  ring  in  the 
barrel. 

236.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him, 
will  return  rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered 


:A  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

Remarks  on  the  Manual  of  Arm". 

237.  The  manual  ot  arms  frequently  distorts  the 
persons  of  recruits  before  they  acquirtfease  and  con- 
fidence in  the  several  positions.  The  instructor  will, 
therefore,  frequently  recur  to  elementary  principles 
in  the  course  of  the  lessons. 

238.  Recruits  are  also  extremely  liable  to  curve 
the  sides  and  back,  and  to  derange  the  shoulders,  espe- 
cially in  loading.  Consequently,  the  instructor  will 
not  cause  them  to  dwell  too  long  at  a  time  in  one  po- 
sition. 

239.  When,  after  somo  days  of  exercise  in  the  man- 
ual of  arms,  the  four  men  shall  be  well  Established  in 
their  use,  the  instructor  will  always  terminate  the  les- 
son by  marching  the  men  for  somo  time  in  one  rank, 
and  at  one  pace  apart,  in  common  and  quick  time,  in 
order  to  confirm  them  more  and  more  in  the  mechan- 
ism of  the  step  ;  he  will  also  teach  them  to  mark  time 
and  to  change  step,  which  will  be  executed  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner : 

To  Mark   Time. 

240.  The  four  men  marching  in  the  direct  step,  the 
instructor  will  command : 

1.  Mark  time.    2.  March. 

241.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the' instant  a  foot  is  coming" to  t!.ie- ground,  the  re- 
cruits will  make  a  semblance  of  marching,  by  bring- 
ing the  heels  by  the  sido  of  each  other,  and  observ- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.     55 

ing  the  cadence  of  the  step,  by  raising  each  foot  al- 
ternately without  advancing. 

242.  The  instructor  wishing  the  direct  step  to  be 
resumed,  will  command : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

243.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
as  prescribed  above,  the  recruits  will  retake  the  step 
of  twenty-eight  inches.. 

To  change  step. 

244.  The  squad  being  in  march,  tho  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  Change  step.   2.  March. 

245.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  bo  given 
at  the  iustant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
bring  the  foot  which  is  in  rear  by  the  side  of  that 
which  is  in  front,  and  step  off  agaiu  with  the  foot 
which  was  in  front. 

To  march  hackicards. 

246.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march 
backwards,  will  command : 

1.  Squad  backwards.     2.  MARCH. 

247.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will  step 
off  smartly  with  the  left  foot  fourteen  inches  to  the 
rear,  reckoning  from  heel  to  heel,  and  so  on  with  the 


56  SCHOOL  OF  TIIE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

feet  in  succession  till  the  command  halt,  which  will 
always  be  preceded  by  the  caution  squad.  The  men 
wall  halt  at  this  command,  and  bring  back  the  foot  in 
front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

248.  Tliis  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

249.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that,  the  re- 
cruits march  straight  to  the  rear,  and  that  the  erect 
position  of  the  body  and  piece  be  not  deranged. 


LESSON  III. 
To  load  in  four  times. 

250.  The  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  the  re- 
cruits to  load  at  will,  and  to  cause  them  to  distinguish 
the  times  which  require  the  greatest  regularity  and 
attention,  such  as  charge  cartridge,  ram  cartridge,  and 
prime.    It  will  be  divided  as  follows : 

"251.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of 
the  command  $  the  three  others  at  the  command  two, 
three  and  four. 

The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.    2.  Load. 

252.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  car- 
tridge. 

Two. 

253.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge. 


sciiool  of  the  s  'ldier-part  ii.        57 
Three.   * 

254.  Execute  the  time  to  include  prime. 

Four. 

255.  Execute  the  times  of  shoulder  arms. 

To  load  at  will. 

256.  The  instructor  will  next  teach  loading  at  will, 
which  will  be  executed  as  loading  in  four  times,  but 
continued,  and  without  resting  on  either  of  the  times. 
He  will  command : 


1.  Load  at  will.    2.  Load. 

257.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by 
degrees,  to  load  with  the  greatest  possible  prompti- 
tude, each  without  regulating  himself  by  his  neighbor, 
and  abovo  all  without  waiting  for  him. 

258.  The  cadence  prescribed  No.  129,  is  not  appli- 
cable to  loading  in  four  times,  or  at  will. 


Lesson  IV. 

Firings. 

259.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,  and  .will  be 
executed  as  follows : 
5* 


58  SCHOOL   OF  THE   SOLDIER— PART  II. 

The  direct  Fire. 

260.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  com- 
mands : 

1.  Fire  by  squad.     2.  Squad.    3.  Ready.     4."  Aim. 

5.  Fire.    6.  Load. 

261.  These  several  commands  will  be  executed  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arms.  At  the 
third  command,  the  men  will  come  to  the  position  of 
ready  as  heretofore  explained.  At  the  fourth  they 
will  aim  according  to  the  rank  in  which  each  may 
find  himself  placed,  the  pear  rank  men  inclining  for- 
ward a  little  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order  that 
their  pieces  may  reach  as  much  beyond  the  front  rank 
as  possible. 

262.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their 
pieces  and  return  immediately  to  the  position  of 
ready. 

263.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by 
the  commands : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Aim.  '  3.  Fike.    4.  Load. 

264.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  cease, 
he  will  command : 

Cease  firing. 

265.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing, 
but  will  load  their  pieces  if  unloaded,  and  afterwards 
bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 


SCHOOL  OF   THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.  59 

Oblique  Firing. 

266.  The  oblique  firings  will  be  executed  to  the 
right  and  left,  and  by  the  same  commands  as  the  di- 
rect fire,  with  this  single  difference— the  command 
aim  will  always  be  preceded  by  the  caution,  right  or 
left  oblique. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire 
to  the  right. 

267.  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will  ex- 
ecute what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

268.  At  the  cautionary  command*,  right  oblique,  the 
two  ranks  will  throw  back  the  right  shoulder  and  look 
steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

269.  At  the  command  aim,  each  front  rank  man  will 
aim  to  the  right  without  deranging  the  feet;  each 
rear  rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about  eight 
inches  toward  the  right  heel  of  the  men  next  on  the 
right  of  his  file  leader  and  aim  to  the  right,  inclining 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  lit- 
tle the  left  knee. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire 
to  the  left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command  left  oblique,  the 
two  ranks  will  throw  back  the  left  shoulder  and  look 
steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

271.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take 
aim  to  the  left  without  deranging  the  feet ;  each  man 


60      ■        SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

in  the  rear  rank  will  advance  the  right  foot  about 
eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next 
on  the  right  of  his  file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  in- 
clining the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bend- 
ing a  little  the  right  knee. 

272.  In  both  cases  at  the  command  load,  the  men 
of  each  rank  will  come  to  the  position  of  load  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  direct  fire  ;  the  rear  rank  men  bringing 
back  the  foot  which  is  to  the  right  and  front  by  the 
side  of  the  other.  Each  man  will  continue  to  load  as 
if  isolated. 

To  fire  by  file., 

273.  The  fire  by  file  will  bo  executed  by  the  two 
ranks,  the  files  of  which  will  fire  successively,  and 
without  regulating  on  each  other,  except  for  the  first 
fire. 

274.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.  Squad.      3.  Ready.      4.  Com- 
mence Firing. 

275.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take 
the  position  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

276.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right 
will  aim  and  fire ;  the  rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will 
take  the  position  indicated  No.  176. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces 
briskly  and  fire  a  second  time  ;  re-load  and  fire  again, 
and  so  on  in  continuation. 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim  at  the  instant  the  first 
brings  down  pieces  to  re-load,  and  will  conform  in  all 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-PART  II.  61 

respects  to  that  which  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  first  file. 

279.  After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank 
men  will  not  be  required  to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

280.  Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to  the 
position  of  ready,  and  continue  the  fire. 

281.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to  cease, 
he  will  command ; 


Cease — Firing. 

882/  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing 
If  they  have  fired  they  will  load  their  pieces  and 
bring  them  to  a  shoulder ;  if,  at  the  position  of  ready, 
they  will  half-cock  and  shoulder  arms.  If  in  the 
position  of  aim,  they  will  bring  down  their  pieces, 
half-cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 


To  fire  by  rank. 

283.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  en- 
tire rank  alternately. 
234.  The  instructor  will  command  : 


1.  Fire  by  rank.      2.  Squad.      3.  Ready.      4.  Rear 
rank.    5.  Aim.     6.  Fire.     7.  Load. 

285.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will 
take  the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  direct 
fire. 

236.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank  will 
execute  that  which  has  been  prescribed  in  the  direct 
fire,  and  afterward  take  the  position  of  ready. 


62  SCHOOL  OF   THE  SOLDIER-PART  II. 

287.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  sees  several  men  of 
the  rear  rank  in  the  position  of  ready,  he  will  com- 
mand : 


].  Front  rank.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  tbe  front  rank* 
will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  rear 
rank,  but  they  will  not  step  off  with  the  right  foot 

289.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by 
the  reaivrank,  and  will  thus  continue  to  alternate  from 
rank  to  rank,  until  he  shall  wish  tbe  firing  to  cease, 
when  he  will  command,  cease  firing,  which  will  be 
executed  as  heretofore  prescribed. 

Lesson  V. 

To  fire  and  load  kneeling. 

290.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  supposed 
loaded  and  drawn  up  in  oue  rank.  The  instruction 
will  be  given  to  each  man  individually,  without  times 
or  motions,  and  in  the  following  manner. 

291.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

FIRE   AND   LOAD  KNEELING.  . 

292.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of 
the  squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt ; 
then  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to  the 
right  of  the  left  heel,  and  in  a  position  convenient 
for  placing  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  in  bend- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.  63 

ing  the  left  leg;  place  the  right  knee  upon  the 
ground;  lower  the  piece-,  the  left  fore-arm  supported 
upon  the  thigh  on  the  same  side,  the  right  hand  on 
the  small  of  the  stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right 
thigh,  the  left  hand  supporting  the  piece  near  the 
lower  band. 

293.  He  will  next  move  this  right  leg  to  the  left 
around  the  knee  supported  on  the  ground,  until  this 
leg  is  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  left 
foot,  and  thus  seat  himself  comfortably  on  the  right 
heel. 

294.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  sup- 
port it  with  the  loft,  holding  it  near  the  lower  bund, 
the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh  near  the  knee  ; 
seize  the  hammer  with  the  thumb,  the  forefinger  under 
the  guard,  cock  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the 
stock;  bring  the  piece  to  the  shoulder,  aim  and  jire. 

295.  Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is  fired,  and 
support  it  with  the  left  hand,  the  butt  resting  against 
the  right  thigh  ;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear  rising  on 
the  knee,  the  barrel  downwards,  the  butt  resting  on 
the  ground;  in  this  position  support  the  piece  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band,  draw  cartiidge  with 
the  right  and  load  the  piece,  ramming  the  ball,  if  ne- 
cessary, with  both  hands. 

296.  When  loaded  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with 
the  left  hand,  which  holds  it  at  the  upper  band  ;  seize 
it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small 
of  the  stock  ;  turn  the  piece,  the  barrel  uppermost 
and  nearly  horizontal,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the 
left  thigh  ;  half-cods,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime, 
rise,  and  return  to  the  ranks. 


64  SCHOOL  OF.  THE  FOLDIER^-PART  II. 

297.  The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what  hae 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  through 

the  remainder  of  the  squad. 

To  fire  and  load  lying. 

298.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank 
and  loaded;  the  instruction  will  bo  given  individually 
and  without  times  or  motions. 

299.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

FIRE  AND  LOAD  LYING. 

300.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the 
squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt;  he 
will  then  bring  his  piece  to  an  order,  drop  on  both 
knees,  and  place  himself  on  the  ground  flat  on  his 
belly.  In  this  position  he  will  support  the  piece  nearly- 
horizontal  with  the  left  hand,  holding  it  near  the  lower 
band,  the  butt  end  of  the  piece  and  the  left  elbow 
resting  on  the  ground,  the  barrel  uppermost ;  cock 
the  piece  with  the  right  hand',  and  carry  this  hand  to 
the  small  of  the  stock;  raise  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  press  the  butt  against  the  shoulder,  and  rest- 
ing on  both  elbows,  aim  and  fire. 

301.  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down 
and  turn  upon  his  left  side,  still  resting  on  his  left 
elbow  ;  bring  back  the  piece  until  the  cock  is  opposite 
his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting  on  the  ground ;  take 
out  a  cartridge  with  the  right  hand  ;  seize  the  small  of 
the  stock  with  this  hand,  holding  the  cartridge  with  the 
thumb  and  two  first  fingers  ;  he  will  then  throw  himself 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  U.  65 

on  his  back,  still  holding  the  piece  with  both  hands  ; 
carry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  place  the  butt  between 
the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muzzle  elevated.  In 
this  position,  charge  cartridge,  draw  rammer,  ram 
cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

302.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn  again 
upon  his  left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  then 
raise  the  piece  vertically,  rise,  turn  about,  and  resume 
his  position  in  the  ranks. 

303.  The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  throughout 
the  squad. 


Lesson  VI. 


Bayonet  Exercise. 

304!  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be  con- 
fined to  two  movements,  the  guard  against  infantry. 
and  the  guard  against  cavalry.  The  men  will  be 
placed  in  one  rank,  with  two  paces  interval,  and  being 
at  shouldered  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 


1.  Guard  againtt  infantry.    2.  Guard. 

One  time  arfid  two  motions. 

305.  [First  motion.]     Make  a  half  face  to  the  right 
turning  on  both  heels,  the  feet  square  to  each  other ; 


66      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

at  the  same  time  raise  the  piece  slightly,  and  seize  it 
with  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band. 

306.  [  Second  motion.  ]  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty 
inches  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  left,  the  knees  slightly  bent, 
the  weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  on  both  legs  ; 
lower  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  upper- 
most, the  left  elbow  against  the  body;  seize  the  piece 
at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of 
the  stock,  the  arms,  falling  naturally,  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  slightly  elevated. 


Shoulder — ARMS. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

307.  Throw  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left  and  face  to 
the  front. 

1.   Guard  against  cavalry.     2.  Guard. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

308.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for  guard  against 
infantry,  except  that  the  right  hand  will  be  support- 
ed against  the  hip,  and  the  bayonet  held  at  the  height 
of  the  eye,  as  in  charge  bayonet. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.     67 

Shoulder— Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

309.  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  lace 
to  the  front. 


PART   THIRD. 


'310.  When  the  recruits  are  well  established  in  the 
principles  and  mechanism  of  the  step,  the  position  of  the 
body,  and  the  manual  of  arms,  the  instructor  will  unite 
eight  men,  at  least,  and  twelve  men,  at  most,  in  order 
to  teach  them  the  principles  of  aligmuent,  the  princi- 
ples of  the  touch  of  elbows  in  marching  to  the  front, 
the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank,  .wheeling 
from  a  halt,  wheeling  in  marching,  and  the  change  of 
direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will  place  the 
squad  in  one  rank  elbow  to  elbow,  and  number  the 
men  from  right  to  left. 


Lesson  I. 
Alignments. 

311.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  recruits  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  in  order  the  better  to 
make  them  comprehend  the  principles  of  alignment; 


69      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 

to  this  end,  he  will  command  the  two  men  on  the  right 
flank  to  march  two  paces  to  the  front,  and  having 
aligned  them,  he  will  caution  the  remainder  of  the 
squad  to  move  up,  as' they  may  be  successively  called, 
each  by  his  number,  and  align  themselves  successively 
on  the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

312.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number,  will 
turn  the  head  aud  eyes  to  the  right  as  prescribed  in  the 
first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  and  will  march  in  quick 
time  two  paces  forward,  shortening  the  last,  so  as  to 
find  himself  about  six  inches  behind  the  new  align- 
ment, which  he  ought  never  to  pass ;  he  will  next 
move  up  steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches,  the 
hams  extended,  to  the  side  of  the  man  next  to  him  on 
the  alignment,  so  that,  without  deranging  the  head  the 
line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the  shoulders,  he  may  find 
himself  in  the  exact  line  of  his  neighbor,  whose  elbow 
he  will  lightly  touch  without  opening  his  own. 

313.  The  instructor  Beeing  the  rank  well  aligned, 
will  command : 

Front. 

314.  At  this  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
and  remain  firm. 

315.  Alignments  "to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the 
same  principles. 

316.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  correctly,  and  without 
groping  or  jostling,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  entire 
rank  to  align  itself  at  once  by  the  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.  69 

Right  (or  left)— Dress. 

317.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  placed 
in  advance  as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will  move  up  in 
quick  time,  and  place  themselves  on  the  new  align,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  312.    . 

318.  The  instructor, placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front, 
and  facing  the  rank,  will  carelfelly  observe  that  the 
principles  are  followed,  and  then  pass  to  the  flank  that 
has  served  as  the  basis,  to  verify  the  alignment. 

319.  The  instructor  soeing  the  greater  number  of 
the  rank  well  aligned,  will  command  : 


Front. 


320.  The  instructor  may  afterwards  order  this  or 
that  file  forward  or  back,  designating  each  by  its  num- 
ber. The  file  or  files  designated,  only,  will  slightly 
turn  the  head  towards  the  basis,  to  judge  how  much 
they  ought  to  move  up  or  back,  steadily  place  them- 
selves on  the  line,  and  then  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
without  a  particular  command  to  that  effect. 

321.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  excuted  on  the 
same  principles,  the  recruits  stepping  back  a  little 
beyond  the  line,  and  then  dressing  up  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  No.  312,  the  instructor  com- 
manding; : 


70  SCHOOL  OF  1  HE  SOLDIER— PART  IIL 

Right  (or  left)  backward — DRESS. 

-'.  After  each  alignment,  the  instructor  will  ex- 
amine the  position  of  the  men,  and  cause  the  rank  to 
corae  to  ordered  arms,  to  prevent  too  much  fatigue, 
and  aJso  the  danger  and  negligence  at  shouldered  arms. 

LESSON  II. 

320.  The  men  having  learned,  the  first  and  second 
parts,  to  march  with  steadiness  in  common  time,  and 
to  take  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness,  will  be 
exorcised  in  the  third  part  only  in  quick  time,  double 
quick  time,  and  the  run;  the  instructor  will  cause 
them  to  execute  successively,  at  these  different  gaits, 
•the  march  to  the  front,  the  lacing  about  in  marching, 
the  march  by  the  flank,  the  wheels  at  a  halt,  and  in 
marching,  and  the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide. 

324.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits  that  at 
the  command  march,  they  will  always  move  off  in 
quick  time,  unless  his  commaud  should  be  preceded  by 
that  of  double  quick. 

To  march  to  the  front. 

325.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  front, 
he  will  place  a  well  instructed  man  on  the  right  of 
the  left,  according  to  the  side  on  which  he  may  wish 
the  guide  to  be,  and  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.  71 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  Guide  right  (or  left.) 
3.  March. 

326.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot;  the  guide  will  take. care  to 
march  straight  to  the  frofnt,  keeping  his  shoulders  al- 
ways in  a  square  with  that  line. 

327.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marching  to  the 
front,  that  the  men  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards  the 
side  of  the  guide;  that  they  do  not  open  out  the  left 
elbow,  nor  the  right  arm  ;  that  they  yield  to  pressure 
coining  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  com- 
ing from  the  opposite  side ;  that  they  recover  by  in- 
sensible degrees  the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if  lost ; 
that  they  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no 
matter  on  whieh  side  the  guide  may  be  ;  and  if  found 
before  or  behind  the  alignment,  that  the  man  in  fault 
corrects  himself  by  shortening  or  lengthening  the  step, 
by  degrees,  almost  insensible. 

323.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  cause  recruits  to 
comprehend  that  the  alignment  can  only  be  pre- 
served, in  marching,  by  the  regularity  of  the  step,  the 
touch  of  the  elbow,  and  the  maintenance  of  the  shoul- 
ders in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction  ;  that  if, 
for  example,  the  step  of.  some  be  longer  than  that  of 
others,  or  if  some  march  faster  than  others,  a  separa- 
tion of  elbows,  and  a  loss  of  the  alignment,  would  be 
inevitable;  that  if  (it  being  required  that  the  head 
should  be  direct  to  the  front)  they  do  not  strictly  ob- 
serve the  touch  of  elbows,  it  would  be  impossible  for 
an  individual  to  judge  whether  he  marches  abreast 
with  his  neighbor,  or  not,  and  whether  there  be  not 
au  interval  between  them.  * 


72      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 

329.  The  impulsion  of  tho  quick  step  having-a'ten- 
dency  to  make  men  too  easy  and  free  in  their  move- 
ments, the  instructor  will  be  careful  to  regulate  the 
cadence  of  the  step,  and  to  habituate  them  to  pre- 
serve always  the  erectness  of  the  body,  and  the  due 
length  of  pace. 

330.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  princi- 
ples of  the  direct  march,  the  instructor  will  exercise 
them  in  marching  obliqueiy.  The  rank  being  in  march, 
the  instructor  will  command : 


1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.    2.  March. 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make 
•  a  half  faco  to  tho  right  (or  left,)  and  will  then  march 

straight  forward  in  the  new  direction.  'As  the  men  no 
longer  touch  elbows,  they  will  glance  along  the  shoul- 
ders of  the  nearest  files,  towards  the,  side  to  which 
they  are  obliquing,  and  will  regulate  their  steps  so  that 
the  shoulders  shall  always  be  behind  that  of  their 
next  neighbor  on  that  side,  and  that  his  head  shall  con- 
ceal the  heads  of  the  other  men  in  the  rank.  Besides 
this,  the  men  should  preserve  the  same  length  of  pace 
and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity. 

332.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  primi- 
tive direction,  will  command: 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

333.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make 
a  half  face  to  tho  left  (or  right,,)  and  all  will  then 
march  straight  to  the  front,  cuuforming  to  the  princi- 
ples of  the  direct  march. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IE.  73 

To  march  to  the  'front  in  double  quick  time. 

334.  When  the  several  principles  heretofore  ex- 
plained have  become  familiar  to  the  recruits,  and 
they  shall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of  the 
body,  the  bearing  of  arms,  and  the  mechanism,  length 
and  swiftness  of  the  step,  the  instructor  will  parts 
them  from  quick  to  double  quick  time,  and  the  reverse, 
observing  not  to  make  them  march  obliquely  in  dou- 
ble quick  time,  till  they  are  well  established  in  the 
cadence  of  this  step. 

335.  The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  the 

instructor  will  command : 

1.   Double  quick.     2.  MARCH. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad 
will  step  off  in  double  quick  time.  The  men  will  en- 
deavor to  follow  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  first 
part  of  this  book,  and  to  preserve  the  alignment. 

337.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to  re- 
.suine  the  step  in  quick  time,  he  will  command : 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March. 

3383.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad 
will  retake  the  step  iu  quick  time. 

339.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will 
halt  it  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed,  Nos. 
98  and  99.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  an  instant 
before  the  foot  is  ready  to  be  placed  on  the  ground.* 
6* 


74  SCH  '•  L  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IIT. 

310.  The  squad  being  in  march  in  double  ijuick 
time,  the.  instructor  will  occasionally  cause  it  to  mark 
time  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  240.  The  men 
will  then  mark  double  quick  time,  without  altering 
the  cadence  of  the  step,  lie  will  also  cause  them  to 
pass  from  the  direct  to  the  oblique  step,  and  recipro- 
city conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No. 
330,  and  following.  , 

341.  The  sqiwtd  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  by  proceeding 
the  command  march  by  double  quick. 

342.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate  we'd 
the  cadence  of  this  step. 


To  face  about  in  marching. 


343.  IF  the  squad  be  inarching  in  quick,  or  double 
quick  time,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  march 
it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Squad  right  about.      2.  March. 

3 14.  At  the  command  march,  which  will.be  given  at 
the  instant  the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the 
recruit  will  bring  this  foot  to  the  ground,  and  turning 
on  it,  will  face  to  the  rear,  he  will  then  place  the 
right  foot  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the 
left  foot. 


SCH  JOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.  75 

To  march  backwards. 


345.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  march  it  in  the  back  step,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.  Guide  left  for  right.) 

3.  March. 

346.  The  back  step  will  bo  executed  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  247. 

347.  The  instructor,  in  this  step,  will  be  watchful 
that  the  men  do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

348.  As  the  inarch  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should 
only  be  executed  at  shoulder  arms,  the  instructor,  in 
order  not  to  fatigue  the  men  too  much,  and  also  to 
prevent  negligence  in  gait  and  position,  will  halt  the 
squad  from  time  to  time,  and  cause  arms  to  be  ordered. 

349.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will 
always  carry,  their  pieces  on  the  right  shoulder,  or  at 
a  trail.     This  rule  is  general. 

350.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried 
at  a  -trail,  he  will  give  the  command  trail  arms,  be- 
fore the  command  double  quick.  If,  on  the  contrary, 
this  command  be  not  giveu,  the  men  will  shift  their 
pieces  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  double 
quick.  In  either  case,  at  the  command  halt,  the  men 
will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms . 
This  rule  is  general. 


Tfi  SCHOOL  "F  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 

Lesson  III. 
To  march  hy  the  flank. 

351.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned, 
the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Squad,  right— Face.     2.    Forward.     3.    March. 

352.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the  rank 
will  face  to  the  right;  the  even  numbered  men,  after 
facing  to  the  right,  will  step  quickly  to  the  right  side 
of  the  odd  numbered  men,  the  latter  standing  fast,  so 
that  when  the  movement  is  executed,  the  meu  will 
be  formed  into  files  of  two  men  abreast. 

353.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot;  the  files  keeping  aligned, 
and  preserving  their  intervals.  * 

354.  The  march  by  the  left  flank  will  bo  executed 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  word  left 
for  right,  and  by  inverse  means ;  in  this  case,  the  even 
numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  left,  will  stand 
fast,  and  the  odd  numbered  will  place  themselves  on 
their  left. 

355.  The  instructor  will  place  a  well  instructed 
soldier  by  the  side  of  the, recruit  who  is  at  the  head  of 
the  rank,  to  regulate  the  step,  and  to  conduct  him ; 
and  it  will  be  enjoined  on  this  recruit  to  march  always 
elbow  to  elbow  with  the  soldier. 

356.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  observed  in  the 
march,  by  the  flunk,  the  following  rules: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLD'ER— PART  III.  77 

That  the  step  he  executed  According  to  the  principles 

prescribed  for  the  direct  step  ; 

Because  these  principles,  without  which  men,  placed 
elbow  to  elbow,  in  the  same  rank,  cannot  preserve 
unity  and  harmony  of  movement,  are  of  a  more  neces- 
sary observance  in  marching  in  file. 

That  the  head  of  the  men  who  immediately    precede, 

covers  the  heads  of  all  icho  arc  in  front ; 

Because  it  is  the  most  certain  rule  by  which  each 
man  may  maintain  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  the  file. 

357.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  habitually 
five  or  six  paces  on  the  Hank  of  the  rank  marching  in 
file  to  watch  over  the  execution  of  the  principles  pre- 
scribed above.  He  will  also  place  himself  sometime 
in  its  rear,  halt,  and  suffer  it  to  pass  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces,  the  better  to  see  whether  the  men  cover  each 
other  accurately. 

358.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank, marching 
by  the  flank,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt.    3.   Front. 

359.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt, 
and  afterwards  no  man  will  stir,  although  he  many 
have  lost  his  distance.  This  prohibition  is  necessary, 
to  habituate  the  men  to  a  constant  preservation  of 
their  distances. 

360.  At* the  third  command,  each  man  will  front  by 
.  facing  to  the  left,  if  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and 


n  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  It 

by  a  face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by  the  left  flank. 
The  rear  rank  men  ^vill  at  the  same  time  move  quick- 
ly into  their  places,  so  as  to  form  the  squad  again  into 
one  rank. 

361.  When  the  men  have  become  accustomed  to 
marching  by  the  flank,  the  instructor  will  cause  them 
to  change  direction  by  file  :  for  this  purpose  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  fie  left  (or  right.)    2.  March. 

362.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  first  file  willchange 
direction  to  the  left  [or  right]  in  describing  a  small 
arc  of  a  circle,  and  will  then  march  straight  forward  : 
the  two  men  of  thisfile,  in  wheeling,  will  keep  up  the 
touch  of  the  elbows,  and  the  man  on  the  side  to  which 
the  wheel  is  made,  will  shorten  the  first  three  or  four 
steps.  Each  file  will  come  successively  to  wheel  on 
the  same  spot  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

363.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to 
face  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  and  for 
this  purpose  will  command: 

1.    Squad  ly  the  right  [or  left]  flank.     2.  March. 

364.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  a 
little  before  either  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  re- 
cruits will  rum  the  body,  plant  the  foot  that  is  raised 
in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot 
without  altering  the  cadence  of  the  step ;  the  men  will 
double  or  undouble  rapidly. 

365.  If,  in  facing  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank,  the 
squad  should  face  to  the  rear,  the  men  will  come  into 
one  rank,  agreeable  to  the  principles  indicated  in  No. 
360.    It  is  to  be  remarked  that  it  is  the  men  who  are 


sen 

k. 

:'ac«  by  tb 

1.  N  - 

doub. 
The  n 

; 


in  th- 

To  march  by  the  flank  in  dam\U  qmiek  time. 
368.  The  pr.  a<?  flank  in 

doub.  -:me.   Tie 

_ 

i  ac- 
cording to  the  sa 


80  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  HJ. 

371.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  pieces  to  ho  car- 
ried either  on  the  right  shoulder  or  at  a  trail. 

372.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the  squad. 
by  the  flank  without  doubling  th«  files. 

373.  The  principles  of  this  march  aro  the  same  as 
iu  two  ranks,  and  will  alwayi  be  executed  in  quick 
time.  • 

374.- The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed, No.  351,  but  he  will  be  careful  to  caution  the 
squad  not  to  double  tiles. 

375.  The  instructor  will  bo  watchful  that  the  men 
do  not  bend  their  knees  unequally,  which  would  cause 
them  to  tread  on  the  heels  of  the  men  in  front,  and  also 
to  lose  the  cadence  of  the  step  and  their  distances. 

376.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will  be 
executed  insiugle  rank.  In  the  changes  of  direction, 
the  leading  men  will  change  direction  without  altering 
the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the  step.  The  instructor 
will  recall  to  the  attention  of  the  men  that,  in  faeing 
by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  they  will  not 
double  but  march  in  oae  rank. 


LESSON  IV. 


WHEELINGS. 


General  principles  of  "Wheeling. 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds  :  from  halts,  or  on 
fixed  pivots,  and  in  march,  or  moveable  pivots. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 


Bl 


378.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in  pass- 
ing a  corps  from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in 
column,  or  from  the  latter  to  the  former. 

379.  Wheels  in  marching  take  place  in  -changes  of 
direction  in  column,  as  often  as  this  movement  is  ex- 
ecuted to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide. 

380.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot  man  only  turns 
in  his  place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

331.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot  takes 
steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad 
is  marching  in  quick  or  double  quick  time,  so  as  to 
clear  the  wheeling  point,  which  is  necessary,  in  order 
that  the  subdivisions  of  a  column  may  change  direc- 
tion without  losing  their  distances,  as  will  be  explained 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

382.  The'man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  the 
full  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  or  thirty-threo  inches, 
according  to  the  gait. 


Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  a  Jixed  pivot. 

383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor' wiP 
place  a  well  instructed  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to 
conduct  it,  and  then  command  : 


1 .  By  squad,  right  wheel.    2.  March. 

•s. 

3^4.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  step  off 
with  the  left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  time  the  head  a 
little  to  the  left,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes 
of  the  men  to  their  left ;  the  pivot  man  will  merely 
mark  time  in  gradually  turning  his  body,  in  order  to 


82  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  ITT. 

conform  himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching 
flank ;  the  man  who  conducts  this  flank  will  take  steps 
of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  from  the  first  step  advance 
a  little  the  left  shoulder,  cast  his  eyes  from  time  to 
time  along  the  rank,«nd  feel  constantly  the  elbow  of 
the  next  man  lightly,  but  never  push  him. 

385.  The  other  man  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of 
the  next  man  towards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure  com- 
ing from  the  opposite  side,  and  each  will  conform  him- 
self to  the  marching  flank — shortening  his  step  ac- 
cording to  his  approximation  to  the  pivot. 

386.  The  instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel  round 
the  circle  once  or  twice  before  halting,  in  order  t<» 
cause  the  principles  to  be  well  understood,  and  he 
will  be  watchful  that  the  centre  does  not  break. 

3S7.  He  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles. 

388.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
wheel,  he  will  command: 


1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

389.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and 
no  man  stir.  The  instructor,  going  vto  the  flank  oppo- 
site the  pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  men  of  that 
flank  in  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  the  rank, 
without  however  displacing  the  pivot,  who  will  eon- 
form  tha  line  of  his  shoulders  to  this  direction.  The 
instructor  will  take  care  to  have  between  these  two 
men  and  the  pivot  only  the  space  necessary  to  con- 
tain the  other  men.     He  will  then  command: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLD.ER— rART  HI.  83 

Left  (or  right)— Dress. 

300.  At  this,  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  align- 
ment of  the  two  men  established  as  the  basis,  in  con- 
formity with  the  principles  prescribed. 

:.  The  instructor  will    next  command  Front, 
eh  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No  314. 

Remarks  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  from 

a  Jpalt.* 

392.  Turn  a  little  the  head  towards  the  marching 
flank,  and  fir,  the  dyes  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men 
who  are  on  that  side ; 

Because,  otherwise,  it  would  be  impossible  for  each 
man  to  regulate  the  length  of  his  step  so  as  to  conform 
his  own  movement  to  that  of  the  marching  flank. 

Touch,  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  towards  the 

pivot  ; 

In  order  that  the  files  may  not  open  out  in  tho  wheel. 

Resist  pressure  that  comes  from  the  side  of  the  marching 

flank; 

Because,  if  this  principle  be  neglected,. the  pivot, 
which  ought  to  be  a  fixed  point,  in  wheels  from  a  halt, 
might  be  pushed  out  of  its  place  by  pressure. 


84  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDER— PART  HI. 

Wheeling  in  marching,  or   on  a   moveable 
pivot. 

393.  When  the  recruits  have  been  brought  to  exe- 
cute well  the  wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be  tau 

to  wheel  in  marching. 

394.  To  this  end,  the  rank,  being  in  march,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  •hange  direc- 
tion to  the  reverse  flank,  (to  the  side  opposite  to  the 
guide  or  pivot  flank,)  he  will  command : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March. 

395  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
rank  is  yet  four  paces  from  the  wheeling  point. 

396.  At  the  second'command,the  wheel  will  be  ex- 
ecuted iu  the  same  manner  as  from  a  halt,  except  that 
the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  remain  towards  the  march- 
ing flank  (or  side  of  the  guide)  instead  of  th«  side  of 
the  actual  pivot ;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  mere- 
ly turning  in  his  place,  will  conform  himself  to  the 
movement  of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly  the  elbow 
of  the  next  man,  take  steps  of  full  nine  inches,  and 
thus  gain  ground  forward  in  describing  a  »mall  curve 
so  as  to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel.  The  middle  of 
the  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As  soon  as 
the  movement  shall  commence,  the  man  who  conducts 
the  marching  flank  will  cast  hi»  eyes  on  the  ground 
over  which  he  will  have  to  pass. 

397.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
command ; 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.  85 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

393.  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced  when 
four  paces  are  yet  required  to  complete  the  change  of 
direction. 

399.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  of  completing  the  wheel,  the  man  who 
conducts  the  marching  tlank  will  direct  himself  straight 
forward  ;  the  pivot  man  and  all  the  rank  will  re-take 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring  the  head 
direct  to  the  front. 

Turning-,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide. 

400.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  in  marching,  will  be  executed  as  follows.  The 
instructor  will  command : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  turn.    2.  March. 

401.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
rank  is  yet  four  paces  from  the  turning  point. 

402.  At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at 
ttie  instant  the  rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face 
t<»  the  left  (or  right)  in  marching,  and  move  forward 
in  the  new  direction  without  slackening  or  quickening 
the  cadence,  and  without  shortening  or  lengthening  the 
stop.  The  whole  rank  will  promptly  conform  itself  to 
the  new  direction  ;  to  effect  which,  each  man  will  ad- 
vauce  the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  take  the 
double,  quick  step,  to  carry  himself  in  the  new  direction, 


86  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PARI  III 

turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  and 
retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow  on  that  side,  in  placing 
himself  oil  the  alignment  of  the  guide,  from  whom  he 
will  Like  the  step,  and  then  resume  the  direct  position 
of  the  head.  Each  man  will  thus  arrive  successively 
on  the  alignment.         , 


Wheeling  and  changing  direction  to  the  side 
of  the  guide,,  in  double  quick  time. 


403  When  the'  recruits  comprehend  and  execute 
well,  iu  quick  time,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  march- 
ing, and  the  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  same  movements 
to  be  repeated  in  double  quick  time. 

404.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  by 
the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  iu  quick  time,  except  that  the  command 
double  quick  will  precede  that  of  march.  In  wheeling 
while  marching,  the  pivot  man  will  take  steps  of  eleven 
inches,  and  in  the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide,  the  men  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide 
must  increase  the  gait  in  order  to  bring  themselves 
into  line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  order -not  to  fatigue  the  re- 
cruits, and  not  to  divide  their  attention,  will  cause 
them  to  execute  the  several  movements  of  which  this 
lesson  is  composed,  first  without  arms,  and  next,  after 
the  mechanism  be  well  comprehended,  with  arms 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.  87 

LESSON  V. 
Long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the 


406.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  resumed  the 
exercises  iu  double  quick  time  and  the  run,  with  arms 
and  knapsacks. 

407.  He  will  cause  long  marches  to  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  both  by  the  front  and  by  the  Hank, 
and  by  constant  practice  will  lead  the  men  to  pass 
over  a  distance  of -five  miles  in  sixty  minutes.  The 
pieces  will  be  carried  on  either  shoulder,  and  some- 
times at  a  trail. 

408.  He  will  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches,  at 
a  run,  the  pieces  carried  at  will;  the  men  will  be  iu. 
structed  to  keep  as  united  as  possible,  without,  h<>\v_ 
ever,  exacting  much  regularity,  which  is  impracticable 

409.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  resorted 
to  when,  it  may  be  highly  important  to  reach  a  giveu 
point  with  great  promptitude. 

Stuck  Arms. 


The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

Stack — Arms. 

410.  At  this  command,  number  two  of  the  front  rank 
will  pass  his  piece  before  him,  seize  it  with  the  left 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 

hand  about  the  middle  band;  slope  it  across  the  body, 
barrel  to  the  rear,  tbe  butt  three  inches  above  the 
right  toe  of  the  man  on  bis  left,  muzzle  six  inches  to 
the  right  of  his  right  shoulder. 

ill.  Number  two  of  the  rear  rank  will  turn  his 
piece,  lock  square  to  the  front,' and  pass  it.tohis  front 
rank  man,  who  will  seize  it  with  his  right  hand  about 
the  middle  band  and  incline  it  forward,  resting  the 
neck  of  the  bayonet  on  that  of  his  own  bayonet  and 
close  to  the  blade.  Number  one  of  the  front  rank  will 
turn  the  barrel  of  his  piece  square  to  the  front,  slope 
it  across  the  body,  place  the  neck  of  his  bayonet 
above  the  necks,  and -between  the  blades  of  the  other 
two  bayonets,  holding  the  piece,  with  the  right  hand 
at  the  middle  band,  the  butt  threo  inches  from  the 
ground  in  front  of  his  right  toe. 

412.  Number  two  of  the  front  rank  will  throw  the 
butt  of  the  rear  rank  man's  piece  about  thirty  inches 
to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  resting  the  butt  of  his 
own  piece  on  the  ground  on  the  left,  and  a  little  in 
rear  of  his  left  toe.  At  the  samo  instant,  number  one 
of  the  front  rank  will  rest  the  butt  of  his  piece  on  the 
ground,  a  little  in  front  of  his  right  toe.  Number  one 
of  the  rear  rank  will  incline  his  piece  on  the  stack 
thus  formed. 

413.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  posi- 
tion of  the  soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Break  ranks.     2.  MARCH. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 

To  resume  arms. 


414.  Both  ranks  being  re-formed  in  rear  of  their 
stacks,  the  instructor  will  command : 

Take— Arms. 

415.  At  this  command,  number  one  of  the  rear  rank 
will  re-take  his  piece.  Number  two  of  the  front  rank 
will  seize  his  own  piece  with  his  left  hand,  at  the  mid- 
dle band,  and  his  rear  rank  man's  piece  in  the  same 
manner  with  his  right  hand  ;  and  number  one  of  the 
front  rank  will  seize  his  piece  with  his  right  hand  m 
the  same  manner.  These  two  men  will  raise  the  stack, 
bring  the  butts  together  and  disengage  the  bayonets. 
Number  two  of  the  rear  rank  will  receive  his  pieco 
from  his  front  rank  man,  and  all  will  resume  the  posi- 
tion of  ordered  arms. 


END  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE   SOLDIER. 


,  7< 


TTTC.E    THIRD. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  School  of 
tlie  Company. 

1.  Instruction  by  company  will  always  precede 
that  by  battalion,  and  the  object  being  to  prepare  the 
soldiers  for  the  higher  school,  the  exercises  of  detail 
by  company  will  be  strictly  adhered  to,  as  well  in  re- 
spect to  principles,  as  the  order  of  progression  herein 
prescribed. 

2.  There  will  be.  attached  to  a  company  undergoing 
elementary  instruction,  a  captain,  a  covering  sergeant, 
and  a  certain  number  of  file  closers,  the  whole  posted 
in  the  manner  indicated,  Title  First,  and,  according 
to  the  same  title,  the  officer  charged  with  the  exercise 
of  such  company  will  herein  be  denominated  the 
instructor. 

3.  The  School  of  the  Company  will  be  divided  into 
six  lessons,  and  each  lesson  will  comprehend  five 
articles,  as  follows : 

LESSON  I. 

1.  To  open  ranks. 

2.  Alignment  in  open  rank. 

(90) 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  91 

3.  Manual  of  arms. 

4.  To  close  ranks. 

5.  Alignments,  and  manual  of  %-ms  in  closed  ranks. 


LESSON  II. 

1.  To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

2.  To  fire  by  company. 

3.  To  fire  by  file. 

4.  To  fire  by  rank. 

5.  To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 


LESSON  III. 

1.  To  march  in  line  of  battle. 

2.  To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  to  align  it. 

3.  Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

4.  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time, 
and  the  back  step. 

5.  To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 


LESSON  IV. 

1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

2.  To  change  direction  by  file. 

3.  To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
to  face  it  to  the  front. 

4.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to 
form  it  on  the  right  or  left  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 


92  SCH"OL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I. 

5.  The  company  marching  by  the  flauk,  to  form  it 
by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and  cause  it  to  face 
to  the  right  or  leftW  marching. 


LESSON  V. 


1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a  halt, 
or  while  marching. 

2.  To  march  in,  column. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  halt  in  column. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the 
right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or 
marching. 


LESSON  VI. 


1.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  com- 
pany. 

2.  To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to 
re-enter  into  line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the 
movements  incident  thereto. 

4.  Countermarch. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right 
or  left  into  line  of  battle. 

4,  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two 
ranks.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  the  files  to  be 
numbered,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I.      .    93 
In  each  rank — count  Twos. 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank, 
from  right  to  left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct 
voice,  in  the  same  tone,  without  hurry  and  without 
turning  the  head,  one,  two,  according  to  the  place 
which  each  one  occupies.  He  will  also  cause  the 
company  to  be  divided  into  platoons  and  sections, 
taking  care  that  the  first  platoon  is  always  composed 
of  an  even  number  of  files. 

6.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  concise  as 
possible  in  his  explanations ;  he  will  cause  faults  of 
detail  to  bo  rectified  by  the  captain,  to  whom  he  will 
indicate  them,  if  the  captain  should  not  have  himself 
observed  them  ;  and  the  instructor  will  not  otherwise 
interfere,  unless  the  captain  should  not  well  compre- 
hend, or  should  badly  execute  his  intentions. 

7.  Composure,  or  presence  of  mind  in  him,  who 
commauds,  and  in  those  who  obey,  being  the  first 
means  of  order  iu  a  body  of  troops,  the  instructor  will 
labor  to  habituate  the  company  to  the  essential  quali- 
ty, and  will  himself  give  the  example. 

LESSON    FIRST. 
Article  First. 

To  open  ranks. 

•  8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranks'" 
and  file  closers  well  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall 


94  SCHOOL  ok  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I. 

wish  to  cause  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  he  will  direct 
the  left  guide  to  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  which  being  executed,  he  will  command: 


1.    Attention.     2.    Company.      3.    Shoulder — Arms. 
4.   To  the  rear  open  order. 


9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant, 
and  the  left  guide,  will  step  off  smartly  to  the  rear, 
four  paces  from  the  front  rauk,  in  order  to  mark  the 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank.  They  will  judge  this 
distance  by  the  eye,  without  counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same 
time  on  the  right  flank,  in  order  to  observe  if  these 
two  non-commissioned  officers  are  on  a  line  parallel 
to  the  front  rank,  and  if  necessary,  to  correct  their 
positions,  which  being  executed,  he  will   command  : 


5.  March. 


11.  At  this  command  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear,  without 
counting  the  steps,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the 
alignment  marked  for  this  rank,  conforming  to  what 
is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  321 . 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank 
on  the  left  guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of  this  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSEN  I.  95 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the 
same  time  with  the  rear  rank,  and  will  place  them- 
selves two  paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is  aligned. 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned, 
will  command : 

6.  Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the 
rear  rank  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor  will 
direct  the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant  to  ob- 
serve the  men  in  their  respective  ranks,  and  to  cor- 
rect, if  necessary,  the  positions  of  .persons  and  pieces. 


Article  Second. 
Alignments  in  open-  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in 
the  first  exercise,  align  the  ranks,  man  by  man  the 
better  to  inculcate  the  principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on 
the  right  or  left  of  each  rank  to  march  two  or  three 
paces  forward,  and,  after  having  aligned  them,  com- 
mand : 

By  file  right  (or  left)— Dress. 

20.  At  this,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up 
successively  on  the  alignment,  each  man  being  pre- 
ceded by  his  neighbor  in  the  same  rank,  towards  the 
basis,  by  two  paces,  and  having  correctly  aligned 
himself,  will  cast  his  eyes  to  the  front. 


96  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I. 

21.  Successive  alignments  having  habituated  the 
soldiers  to  dress  correctly,  the  instructor  will  cause 
the  ranks  to  align  themselves  at  once,  forward  and 
backward,  sometimes  in  a  direction  parallel,  and" 
sometimes  in  one  oblique  to  the  origiual  direction, 
giving,  in  each  case,  two  or  four  men  to  serve  as  a 
basis  of  alignment  to  each  rank.  To  effect  which,  he 
will  command : 


1.  Right  (or  left)— Dress.    2.  Front. 

or 

1.  Right  (or  left)  backward— DRESS.     2.  FRONT. 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the  men 
of  the  rear  rank  will  not  seek  to  cover  their  file  lead- 
ers, as  the  stile  object  of  the  exercise  is  to  teach 
them  to  align  themselves  correctly  in  their  respective 
ranks,  in  the  different  directions. 

23.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will  super- 
intend the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the 
rear  rank.  For  this  purpose,  they  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  side  by  which  the  ranks  are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform 
the  line  of  their  shoulders  to  the  new  directions  of 
their  rank,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment, 
as  has  .been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  317  or  321,  according  as  the  new  direction  shall 
be  in  front  or  rear  of  the  original  one. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I.  $7 

25.  At  the  cud  of  each  align  merit,  the  captain  and 
covering  sergeant  will  pass  along  the  front  of  the 
ranks,  to  correct  the  positions  of  persons  and  arms. 


Article  Third. 


Manual  of  Arms. 


26.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will  place 
himself  in  a  position  to  see  the  ranks,  and  will  coin- 
w.  and  the  manual  of  arms  in  the  following  order : 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 
Order  arms. 
Ground  arms. 

Raise  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Trail  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Unfix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Secure  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Load  in  nine  times. 


27.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  position 
of  the  body,  of  the  feet,  and  of  the  piece,  be  always 
exact,  and"  that  the  times  be  briskly  executed  and 
close  tQ  the  person. 


98  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  close  ranks. 

23.  The  manual  of  arms  being  ended,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

1.  Close  order.    2.  March. 

29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will  close 
up  in  quick  time,  each  man  directing  himself  on  his 
file  leader. 

Article  Fifth. 

Alignments,   and  manual  of  arms  in  closed 

ranks. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will 
cause  to  be  executed  parallel  and  oblique  alignments 
by  the  right  and  left,  forward  and  backward,  observ- 
ing to  place  always  two  or  four  files  to  serve  as  a 
basis  of  alignment.  He  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed, No.  21. 

31.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will 
superintend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
the  rear  rank.  They  will  habituate  themselves  to 
judge  the  alignment  by  the  lines  of  the  eyes  and 
shoulders,  in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye  along  the 
front  and  rear  of  the  ranks. 

32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greater 
number  of  the  front  rank  aligned,  he  will  command 
Front,  and  rectify  afterwards,  if  necessary,  the  align- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I.     99 

ment  of  the  other  men  by  the  means  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  320.  The  rear  rank  will 
conform  to  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superin- 
tended by  the  covering  sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will 
place  himself  on  the  flank  to  verify  the  alignment. 
He  will  also  see  that  each  rear  rank  man  covers  ac- 
curately his  file  leader. 

34.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructor  will  ob- 
serve what  is  prescribed,  No.  24. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file  closers  will  preserve 
the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
cause  to  be  executed  the  manual  of  arms. 

37.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  rest  the  men,  with- 
out deranging  the  alignment,  will  first  cause  the  arms 
to  be  supported  or  ordered,  and  then  command : 

■     In  place — REST. 

38.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  be 
constrained  to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness  of  posi- 
tion ;  but  they  will  always  keep  one  or  the  other  heel 
on  the  alignment. 

39.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should  wish 
to  rest  the  men  without  constraining  tnem  to  preserve 
the  alignment,  he  will  command : 

Rest. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  their 
plaees. 


100         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  II. 

41.  The  instructor  may,  also,  when  he  shall  judge 
proper,  cause  arms  to  be  stacked,  which  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier. 

LESSON    SECOND. 

42.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second 
lesson,  will  cause  the  company  to  take  arms,  if  stacks 
have  been  formed,  and  command  : 


1.  Attention.    2.  Company.    3.  Shoulder — Arms. 

43.,  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and 
firings  to  be  executed  in  the  following  order : 


Article  First. 
To  load  in  four  times  and  at  tvill. 

44.  Loading  in  four  times  will  be  commanded  and 
executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.-  251,  and  following.  The  instructor  will  cause 
this  exercise  to  be  often  repeated,  in  succession,  be- 
fore passing  to  loading  at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will  will  be  commanded  and  execu- 
ted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  256. 
In  priming  when  loading  in  four  times,  and  also  at 
will,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  half  face 
to  the  right  with  the  men,  and  face  to  the  front  when 
the  man  next  to  them,  respectively,  brings  his  piece 
to  the  shoulder. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  II.         101 

46.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to  cause 
the  men  in  the  different  loadings,  to  execute  what 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos 
257  and  258. 

47.  Loading  at  will  being  that  of  battle,  conse- 
quently the  one  with  which  it  is  most  important  to 
render  the  men  familiar,  it  will  claim  preference  in 
the  exercises  the  moment  the  men  be  well  established 
in  the  principles.  To  these  they  AvS'l  be  brought  by 
degrees,  so  that  every  man  may  be'-tt^le  to  load  with 
cartridges,  and  to  fire  at  least  three  rounds  in  a 
minute  with  ease  and  regularity. 


Article   Second. 

•     To  fire  by  company. 

43.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by 
company  to  be  executed,  will  command: 

1.  Fire  by  company.     2.  Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly 
place  himself  opposite  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  four  paces  in  rear  of  the-  line  of  file  closers ;  the 
covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  that  line,  and  place 
himself  opposite  to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  general, 
for  both  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  in  all  the 
different  firings. 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add: 

1.  Company;  2.  Ready;  3.  Aim;  4.  Fire;  5.  Load. 

51.  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load  their 


102         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  II. 

pieces  and  then  take  the  position  of  ready,  as   pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

52.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the 
firing  by  the  commands :  - 

1.  Company.    2.  Aim.-  3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

53.  The  finjjgwwill  thus  be  continued  until  the  sig- 
nal to  cease  firfl/g  is  sounded. 

54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  to  the  right  and  left,  simply  observing  to  pro- 
nounce right  (or  left)  oblique,  before  the  command  aim. 


Article  Third. 
The  fire  by  file. 

55.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  file 
to -be  executed,  will  command: 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.  Company.      3.  Ready.     4.  Com- 
mence firing. 

5G.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  execu- 
ted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No  275, 
and  following. 

57-  The  firewill  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of 
the  company ;  the  next  file  will  take  aim  at  the  in- 
stant the  first  brings  down  pieces  to  reload,  and  soon 
to  the  left ;  but  thi%  progression  will  only  be  observed 
in  the  first  discharge,  after  which  each  man  will  re- 
load and  fire  without  regulating  himself  by  others, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  II.  103 

conforming  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  No.  280. 


Article  Fourth. 
The  fire   by  rank. 

58.  Tho  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be 
executed,  will  command : 

1.   Fire  by  rank.     2.  Company.      3.  READY. 

4.  Rear  rank — Aim.    5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

■ 

59.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  executed 
as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  285, 

'  and  following: 

60.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in 
the  rear  rank  at  a  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  rank.    2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alternate 
ranks,  until  the  signal  is  given  to  cease  firing. 

02.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  to  the  right  and  left,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
Bcribed  No.  54. 

63.  The  instructor  will  cause  tie  firing  to  cease, 
whether  by  company,  by  file,  or  by  rank,  by  sounding 
the  signal  to  cease  firing,  and  at  the  instant  this  sound 
commences,  the  men  will  cease  to  fire,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  282! 


104  SCHOOL  OF  tfHE  COMPANY-LESSON  II. 

64.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  always  fol- 
lowed by  a  bugle  note ;  at  which  sound  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant  will  promptly  resume  their 
places  in  line,  and  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  align- 
ment of  the  ranks. 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  powder  is  used,  the 
signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  indicated  by  the  com- 
mand, cease  firing,  which  will  be  pronounced  by  the 
instructor  when  he  wishes  the  semblance  of  firing  to 
cease.__ 

66.  The  command  posts  will  be  likewise  substituted, 
under  similar  circumstances,  for  the  bugle  note  em- 
ployed as  the  signal  for  the  return  of  the  captain  and 
covering  sergeant  to  their  places  in  line,  which  com- 
mand will  be  given  when  the  instructor  sees  the  men 
have  brought  their  pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

67.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  fre- 
quently used  against  an  enemy,  it  is  highly  important 
that  it  be  rendered  perfectly  familiar  to  the  troops. 
The  instructor  will,  therefore,  give  it  almost  exclusive 
preference,  and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim  with 
care,  and  always,  if  possible,  at  some  particular  ob- 
ject. As  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  men 
should  aim  with  precision  in  battle,  this  principle  will 
be  rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises  fof  purposes  of 
instruction. 


school  of  the  qqmpany— lesson  ii.      105 
Article  Fifth. 

To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

OS.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be 
executed  to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.  To 
effect  this,  lie  will  command: 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.      2.  Company.      3.  About 
— Face. 

69.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out 
and  place  himself  near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of 
his  company  ;  the  covering  sergeant  and  file  closers 
will  pass  quickly  through  the  captain's  interval,  and 
place  themselves  faced  to  the  rear,  the  covering  ser- 
geant a  pace  behind  the  captain,  and  the  file  closers 
two  paces  from  the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places 
in  line,  each  passing  behind  the  covering  sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed  through 
the  interval,  the  company  will  face  about ;  the  captain 
will  place  himself  in  his  interval  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
become  the  front,  and  tTie  covering  sergeant  will 
cover  him  in  the  front  rank,  and  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by  com- 
pany, both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire  by  file,  and 
the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  in  tjje  three  preceding  articles  ;  the  cap- 
tain, covering   sergeant,  and  the  men  will   conform 

8* 


106         "SCIIO    L  OF  THE  COMPACT—  LBSBON  II. 

themselves  in  like  manner  t«»  what  is  therein  pro- 
scribed. 

72.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of 
the  company,  now  become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by 
rank,  the  firing  will  commence  with  the  front  rank, 
now  become  the  rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will 
command : 


1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.     2.    Company.     3.  About 
— Face. 


74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering 
sergeant  and  the  file  closers  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  Nos.  69  ami  7U. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having 
laced  about,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will 
resume  their  places  in  line. 

7tj.  In  this  lesson  the  instructor  will  impress  on 
the  men  the  importance  of  aiming  always  at  some 
particular  object,  and  of  holding  the  piece  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  School  of  the  Soldier,  No.  17& 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain 
to  make  a  short  pause  between  the  commands  dim 
and  fire,  to  give  the  men'time  to  aim  with  accuracy. 
J7S.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  position  to 
see  the  two  ranks,  in  order  to  detect  faults  ;  he  will 
charge  the  captain  and  file  closers  to  be  equally  watch- 
ful, and  to  report  to  him  when  the  ranks  are  at  rest. 
He  will  remand  for  individual  instruction  the  men 
who  may  be  observed  to  load  badly. 

79.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  soldiers, 
in  the  firings,  the  highest  degree  of  composure  or  pre- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY- LESSON  II.         107 

sencc  of  mind,  he  will  neglect  nothing  that  may  con, 
tribute  to  this  end. 

80.  Ho  will  givo  to  the  men,  as  a  general  principle, 
t:»  maintain,  in  the.  direct  fire,  the  left  heel  in  its  place, 
in  order  t ha t  the  alignment  of  the  ranks  and  files  may 
not  be  deranged  ;  and  ho  will  verify  by  examination, 
after  each  exercise  in  firing,  the  observance  of  this 
principle. 

81.  The  instructor  will  obsei  ve,  in  addition  to  these 
remarks,  all  those  which  follow. 


82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges,  it 
is  particularly  recommended  that  the  men  observe,  in 
uneocking,  whether  smoke  escapes  from  the  tube, 
-which  is  a  certain  indication  that  the  piece  has  been 
discharged,  but  if,  on  the  contrary,  no  smoke  escapes, 
the  soldier,  in  such  case,  instead  of  re  loading,  will 
pick  and  prime  again.  If,  believing  the  load  to  lie 
discharged,  the  soldier  should  put  a  second  cartridge 
in  his  piece,  he  ought  at  least  to  perceive  it  in  ram- 
ming, by  the  height  of  the  load  ;  and  he  would  bo 
\i'\y  culpable  should  he  put  in  a  third.  The  instruc- 
tor will  always  cause  arms  to  be  inspected  after  firing 
with  cartridges,  in  order  to  observe  if  the  fault;  has 
been  committed  of  putting  three  cartridges,  without 
a  discharge,  in  the  same  piece,  in  whicfi*case  the  ball 
screw  will  be  applied. 

It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  cap  has  missed 
lire,  that  the  tube  is  found  stopped  np  with  a  hard, 
white,  and  compact  powder;  in  this  case,  picking 
will  be  dispensed  with,  and  a  new  cap  substituted  for 
t  he  old  one. 


103         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  III. 

LESSON    TfilRD. 

Article  First. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

■  84.  The  company  being  in  line  of  bnttle,  and  cor- 
rectly aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  ex- 
ercise it  in  marching  by  the  front,  he  will  assure  him- 
self that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  are  perfectly  in  the  direction  of  their  respec- 
tive ranks,  and  that  the  sergeant  accurately  covers 
the  .captain;  the  instructor  will  then  place  himself 
twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  them,  lace  to 
the  rear,  and  place  himself  exactly  on  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  line  passing  betweeu  their  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  directing 
file,  will  command : 

1.   Company,  forward. 

86.  At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated,  will 
move  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  captain  ;  the  in- 
structor, from  the  position  prescribed,  will  correctly 
align  this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation  of  the  direct- 
ing file. 

87.  This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be  charged 
with  the  direction,  will,  the  moment  his  position  is 
assured,  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  a  straight 
line  which  would  pass  betweeu  his  own  and  the  heels 
of  his  instructor. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSEN  HI.         109 

88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  tho  instructor 
will  step  aside.,  and  command: 

2.  March. 

89.  At  this  the  company  will  step  off  with  life. 
The  directing  sergeant  will  observe,  with  the  greatest 
precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  march- 
ing on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen  :  he  will  take  in 
succession,  and  always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the 
point  nearest  to  him.  new  points  in  advance,  exactly 
in  the  same  line  with  tin  first  two,  and  nt  the  distance 
of  some  fifteen  of  twenty  pades  from  each  other.  The 
captain  will  march  steadily  in  the  trace  of  tho  direct- 
ing sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces  from  him  ;  the 
men  will  each  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front, 
feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor  on  the  side  of 
direction,  and  conform  himself  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, School  of  the  Soldier,  for  the  march  by  the 
front. 

'  90.  The  man  next  to  the  captain,  will  take  special 
care  not  to  pass  him;  to  this  end,  he  will  keep  the 
line  of  his  shoulders  a  little  in  the  rear,  but  in  the 
same  direction  with  those  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closer.-'  will  march  at  the  habitual  dis- 
tance of  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

92.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will 
command: 

To  the— Step. 

9:5.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  towards 
tho  directing  sergeant,  retake  the  step  from  him,  and 
again  direct  their  eyes  to  tho  front. 


110  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LKSflON'  III. 

94.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  captain  and  cov- 
ering sergeant  to  be  posted  sometimes  on  the  right, 
and  sometime^  on  the  left  of  the  company. 

95.  The  directing  sergeant  in  advance,  having  the 
greatest  influence  on  the  march  of  the  company,  be 
will  be  selected  for  the  precision  of  his  step,  his  babit 
of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given 
line  of  direction,  and  of  prolonging  that  line  without 
variation. 

96.  If  tbis^  sergeant  should  fail  to  observe  these  prin- 
ciples, undulations  in  the  front  of  the  company  must 
necessarily  follow;  the  men  will  be  unable  to  con- 
tract the  habit  of  taking  steps  equal  in  length  and 
swiftness,  and  of  maintaining  their  shoulders  in  a 
square  with  the  line;  of  direction — the  only  means  of 
obtaining  perfection  in  the  march  of  line. 

97.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  better  to  esta- 
blish the  men  in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step. 
and  in  the  principles  of  the  inarch  in  line,  will  cause 
the  company  to  advance  three  or  four  hundred  paces, 
at  once,  without  halting,  if  the  ground  will  permit.  In 
the  first  exercises,  he  will  march  the  company  with 
open  ranks,  the  better  to  observe  the  two  ranks. 

I.  The  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  that  all  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  line  are  strictly  observed; 
lie  will  generally  be  on  the  directing  flank;  in  a  position 
to  observe  the  two  ranks,  and  the  faults  they  may 
commit,  he  will  sometimes  halt  behind  the  directing 
file  during  some  thirty  successive  steps,  in  ordi 
judge  whether  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  directing 
file,  deviate  from  the  perpendicular. 


SCHOOL  OF   THE  COMPANY—  LESSON  III.         Ill 

Article   Second. 

To  halt  the  company  inarching  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  to  align  it. 

99.  Th-'  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company, 
will  command: 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt. 

100.  At  the  Bexibnd  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  directing  sergeant  will  remain  in  advance, 
unless  ordered  to  return  to  the  fine  of  file  closers; 
The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may  ad- 
vance the  first  three  or  four  files  on  the  side  of  direc- 
tion, and  align  the,  company  on  that  basis,  or  he  may 
confine  himself  to  causing  the  alignment  to  he  recti- 
fied. In  this  last  Case,  he  will  command:  Captain, 
rectify  the  alignment.  The  captain  will  direct  the 
covering  sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear  rank,  when 
each,  glancing  his  eye  along  his  rank,  will  promptly 
rectify  it,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  No.  330. 

Article-Third. 
Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  oblique- 
ly, he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 


112  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY- LESSON  III. 

102.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take 
the  oblique  Btep.  The  men  will  acurately  observe 
the  principles  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier, 

No.  331.  The  rear  rank  men  will  preserve  their  dis- 
tances, and  march  in  rear  of  the  n'an  next  to  the 
right  for  left)  of  their  habitual  file  leaders. 

103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  march 
to  be  resumed,  he  will  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

104.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  re- 
sume the  direct  march.  The  instructor  will  irmve 
briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  and  facing 
the  company,  will  place  himself  exactly  in  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant ;  and  then 
by  a  sign,  will  move  the  directing  sergeant  on  the  same 
line,  if  he  he  not  already  on  it;  the  latter  will 'imme- 
diately take  the  two  points  on  the  ground  between 
himself  and  the  instructor,  and  as  he  advances,  will 
take  new  points  of  direction,  as  is  explained  No.  89. 

105.  In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  having  the 
touch  of  elbows,  the  guide  will  always  be  on  the  side 
towards  which  the  oblique  is  made,  without  any  indi- 
cation to  that  effect  being  given;  and  when  the  direct 
march  is  resumed,  the  guide  will  be,  equally  without 
indication,  on  the  side  where  it  was  previous  to  the 
oblique. 

106.  The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the  oblique 
to  be  made,  towards  the  side  of  the  guide.  lie  will 
also  direct  the  captain  to  have  an  eye  on  the  direct- 
ing sergeant,  in  order  to  keep  on  the  same  perpen- 
dicular line  to  the  front  with  him,  while  following  a 
parallel  direction. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  III.        113 

107.  During  the  Continuance  of  the  march,  the  in- 
structor will  be  watchful  that  the  men  follow  parallel 
directions,  in  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  School  of  the  Soldier,  for/preserving  the  gene- 
ral alignment i  Whenever  the  men  lost*  the  alignment, 
he  will  he  careful  thai  they  regain  it  by  lengthening 
or  shortening  the  step,  without  altering  the  cadence, 
or  changing  the  direction. 

108.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of 
the  company  and  face  to  it,  in  order  to  regulate  the 
march  of  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  man  who  is 
on  the  flank  toward  which  the  oblique  is  made,  and 
to  see  that  the  |rriiieiples  of  the  march  are  properly 
observed,  aud  that  the  files  do  not  crowd. 


Article  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time, 
and  the  back  step. 

109.  The  company  being  iu  the  direct  march  and 
in  quick  time,  the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  mark 
time,  will  command  : 

J.  Mark  time.     2.  March. 

HO.  To  resume  the  march,  he.  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 


114        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  HI. 

111.  To  cause  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the 

instructor  will  command: 

I.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 

112.  The  command  march  will  be   pronounced  at 
the  instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

313.  To   resume   quick  time,  the   instructor  will 
command  : 


1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 


114.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
iustant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

115.  The.  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor 
may  cause  it  to  march  in  the  back  step;  to  this  eil'ect, 
he  will  command : 

1.   Company  backward.     2.  Makott. 

116.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principle  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier, 
No.  247,  but  the  use  of  it  being  rare,  the  instructor  will 
not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or  twenty  steps  to  be  ta- 
ken in  succession,  and  to  that  extent  but  seldom. 

117.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  com- 
pany in  marching  in  double  quick  time  till  tlie  men 
are  well  established  in  the  length,  and  swiftness  of  the 
pace    in  quick  time;  ho  will  then  endeavor  to  render 


,      SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPAK3T— LESSON  III.        116 

the  march  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in  the 
minute  equally  easy  and  familiar,  and  also  cause  them 
to  observe  the  same  erectness  of  body  and  composure 

P  mind,  as  if  marching  in  quick  time. 

118.  When  marching  in  double  quick  time,  if*  a  sub- 
division (in  a  column)  has  to  change  direction  by 
turning j  or  has  to  form  into  iine,  the  men  will  quick- 
en the  pad-  to  one  hundred  and  eighty  steps  in  a 
minute.  The  same  swiftness  of  step  will  he  observed 
under  all  circumstances  where  great  rapidity  of  move- 
ment is  required.  But,  as  ranks  of  men  cannot  march 
any  length  of  time  at  so  swift  a  rate,  without  break- 
ing or  confusion,  this  acceleration  will  not  be  consid- 
ered a  prescribed  exercise,  and  accordingly  compan- 
ies or  battalions  will  only  be  habitually  exercised  in 
the  double  quick  tune  of  one  hundred  andsixty-five 
steps  iu  a  minute. 


Article  Fifth. 

To  march  in  retreat. 

110.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  align- 
ed, when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march 
in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

J.   Company.     2.  About — Face. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the  in- 
structor will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  directing 
file,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  84. 


116        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  III. 

121.  The  instructor,  being  correctly  established  on 

the  prolongation  of  the  directing  file,  will  command : 

3.    Company  forward. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform 
himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  86  and  87;  with 
this  difference — he  will  place  himself  six  puces  in  front 
of  the  line  of  file  closers,  now  leading. 

123.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of 
file  closers,  opposite  to  his  interval  and  the  captain  will 
place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front. 

124.  The  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the  in- 
structor will  command : 


4.  March. 

J25.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain, 
and  the  men,  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  89  and  following. 

126.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed, 
marching  in  retreat,  all  thai  is  prescribed  for  march- 
ing in  advance  ;  the  commands  and  the  means  of  ex- 
ecution will  be  the  same.  .        m 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company,' 
will,  when  he  may  wish,  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front 
by  the  command  prescribed  No.  119.  The  captain, 
the  covering  Bergeant,  and  the  directing  sergeant, 
will  resume  their  habitual  places  in  line,  the  moment 
they  shall  have  faced  about. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  Iff.         117 

1-2  .  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front 
rank,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  it  to  march  in  re- 
treat, he  will  cause  the  right  about  face  to  be  executed 
while  mtvching,  and  to  this  effect  will  command: 

1.  Company.     2.  Right  About.     3.  March. 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will 
promptly  face  about,  and  recommence  the  march  by 
the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with 
the  company,  and  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  front 
of  the  file  closers,  and  upon  the  prolongation  of  the 
guide.  The  instructor  wil*  place  him  in  the  proper 
direction  by  the  means  prescribed  Nch  104.  The  cap- 
tain, the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  men,  will  con- 
form to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  march  in  re- 
treat. 

1.1.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company  to 
march  by  the  front  rank  he  will  give  the  same  com- 
mands, and  will  regulate  the  direction  of  tho  march 
by  the  same  means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  in 
double  quick  time,  all  the  movements  prescribed  in 
the  3d,  4th,  5th  and  6th  lessons  of  this  school,  with 
the  exception  of  the  march  backwards,  which  will  be 
executed  only  in  quick  time.  He  will  give  the  same 
commands,  observing  to  add  doable  quick  before  the 
command  march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right  shoul- 
der, in  quick  time,  the  distance  between  tho  ranks 
will  be  Sixteen,  inches.  Whenever,  therefore,  the  in- 
structor brings,  the  company  from  a  shoulder  to  this 
position,  the  rear_ rank  must  shorten  a  little  the  first 
steps,  in  order  to  gain  the  prescribed  distance,  and 
will  lengthen  the  steps,  on  the  contrary,  in  order  to 


118       PCIJOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY- LE8SOM  IV. 

close  up  when  fche  pieceaare  again  brought  boa  shoul- 
der. Id  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  distance 
between  the  ranks  will  be  twenty-six  inches,  and  ihe 
piece  will  be  carried  habitually  on  the  righ*  Bhouldor. 
i:M.  Whenevei*a  company  is  halted,  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  com- 
mand holt.  The  rear  rank  will  close  toils  proper 
distance.      These  rules  arc  general. 


LESSON  FOURTH. 
Article  First. 

To  march  by  the  flank. 

13$.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  a 
halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
march  by  the  right  flank,  he  will  command: 

1.  Company,  right — Face.     2.  Forward. 
3.  March. 

136.  At  t'-ie  first  command,  the  company  will  lace 
to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself 
at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  the  captain  having  step- 
pod  out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to  find  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  sergeant,  and  on  his  left;  the  front  rank 
will  double  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier, No.  35vJ;  the  rear  rank,  will,  at  the  same  time, 
side  step  to  the  right  oue  pace,  and  double  in  the 
same  manner;  so  that  when  the  movement  is  com- 


1 

1 

n     v 

& 
a 

i 

I 

i  1/^   0 

« 

ESI 

□ 

1 

1 
1 

i        t.-xt.l/fc"^*C)                □ 

^•Rb     a 

E 

1    G 

r-kR3    i 

i 

N 

U  a 

•^zT-ta     - 

—•Hri  ,-kj      Q    . 

1 — i    t-, 

3 

J 

I. 

SCH60L  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IV.         119 

pleted,  tho,  file 8  will  be  formed  of  four  men  aligned, 
and  elbow  to  elbow.  The  intervals  will  be  preser- 
ved. 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side  stop  to 
the  right*  so  that  when  the  ranks  arc  formed,  they 
will  be  two  paces  from  the  rearmost  rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
move  oil' briskly  in  quick  time;  the  covering  sergeant 
at  i  he  head  of  the  front  rank  and  the  captain  on  his  left, 
will  march  straight  forward.  The  men  of  each  file 
will  march  abreast  of  their  respective  front  rank  men, 
heads  direct  to  the  front;  the.  file  closers  will  march 
opposite  tii  fir  places  in  line  of  battle. 

139.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  principles  of  the 
march  by  the  Hank  to  be  observed,  in  placing  himself 
pending  the  march,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  367. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  bv  the 
left  flank  to  be  executed  by  the  same  comnaaudjs, 
substituting  left  for  right;  the  ranks  will  double  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  tho  soldier,  No. 
354  ;  the  rear  rank  will  side  step  to  the  left  one  pace 
before  doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left, 
the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
front  rank;  the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  left, 
and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  this  jjuide  ;  the 
covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the 
front  rank,  the  moment  the  latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the 
left. 


120        SCHOOL  OF  TL..  COMPANY— LESSON  IV. 

Article  Second. 

To  change  direction  by  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,   and 
either  in  march  «»r  at  ;i  halt,  when  the  instructor  shall 

wish  to  cause  it   to  wheel  by  file,  he  will   command  : 

3.  By  file  left  (ol  right.)    2.  March.        / 


143.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  first  file  will 
wheel;  if  t<>  the  side  of  the  front  rani;  man,  the  lat- 
ter will  take  care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to  describe 
a  short  arc  ot 'a  circle,  shortening  a  little  the  first  five 
or  six  steps  in  order  to  give  time  to  the  fourth  man  of 
this  file  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement.  If  the 
wheel  be  to  the  side  of  the  rear  rank,  the  front  rank 
man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and 
the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself  to  the  movement 
,by  describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle  as  has  been  ex- 
plained. Each  file  will  come  to  wheel  on  the  same 
ground  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

144.  The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  exe- 
cuted, according  to  these  principles,  in  order  that  the 
distance  between  the  files  may  always  he  preserved, 
and  that  there  be  no  check  or  hindrance  at  the 
wheeling  point. 


• 

! — ' 

L^r  i  i 

Mil  J 
I  til  1 

!  1    1    !    1 

i  i '  i  rn 

n-r-fn 

1  i  i  ?  i 

ss 


80H00L  OF  THE  COMPAN?— LESSON  IV.  121 

Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  Jlank, 
an  J  to  face  it  to  the  front. 

145.  To  effect  these  objects  the  instructor  will  •om- 
nia nd  : 

J.   Cnnvany.     2.  HALT.     3.  FRONT. 

Wo.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos. 
35'J  and  3(i0.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  undoubled, 
the  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  printer  distance.  The 
captain  and  covering  sergeant,  as  well  as  the  left 
guide,  if  the  march  he  by  the  left  Hank,  will  return 
to  their  habitual  places  in  line  at  the  instant  the  com- 
pany faces  to  the  front. 

147.  The  iustruct<»r  may  then  align  the  company  by 
one  of  the  means  prescribed,  No.  1UU. 

Article  Fourth. 

The   company   being  in  inarch  by   the  Jlank, 

to  form  it  on  the  right  {or  left)  by  file 

into  line  of  battle. 

148.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

1 .  On  the  right,  by  file  into  line.     2.  MARCH, 
9* 


122  '  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LK!  SON  IV. 

149  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  Tank  men 
doubled  with  mark  time;  the  captain  and  the  covef- 
ing^eergeant  will  turn  to  the  right,  march  straight  for- 
ward, and  be  halted  by  theinstructor when  they  shall 
Jiave  passed  at  least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file 
closers;  the  captain  will  place  himself  correctly  on  the 
line  of  battle,  and  will  direct  the  alignment  as  the 
men  .of  the  front  rank-  successively  arrj?e;  the  coher- 
ing sergeant  will  place  himself  behind  the  captain 
at  the  distance  of  the  rear  rank;  the  two.  men  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  continue  to 
march, -and  passing  beyond  the  covering  sergeanl  and 
the  captain,  will  turn  to  the'  right;  after  turning,  they 
will  continue  to  inarch,  elbow  to  elboWj  and  direct 
themselves  towards  the  line  of' battle,  but  when  they 
shall  arrive  at  two  paces  from  (his  line,  the  even  num- 
ber will  shorten  the  step  so  that  The  odd  number  may 
precede  him  on  the  line,  the  odd  number  placing  him- 
self by  the  side  and  on  the  left  of  the  captain;  the 
even  number  will  afterwards  oblique  to  the  left,  and 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  odd  number;  the  next 
two  meu  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  pass. in  the 
same  manner  behind  the  two  first,  turn  then  to  the 
right,  and  place  themselves  according  to  the  means 
just  explained,  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of,  the  two 
men  already  established  on  the  line;  the  remaining 
files  of  this  rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and  be 
formed  to  the  left  in  the  same  manner.  The  rear  rank 
doubled,  will  execute  the  movement  in  the  manner 
already  explained  for  the  front  rank,  taking  care  not 
to  commence  the  movement  until  four  men  of  the  front 
rank  are  established  on  the  line  Of  battle ;  the  rear 
rank  men,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  accu- 
rately their  file  leaders. 


1 

ipsa 

■ 

• 

- 

* 

i 

\  s 

, 

- 

a  ■ 

V 

E     i' 

3        C?        B           13    K 
£?     EL 

r^]                          •                  v 

SCH   OL  OF  THE  COMPANY—LESSON  IV.         123 

150.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
the  instructor  will  eause  it  to  form  by  ti'e  on  the  left 
into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  left 

for  right.  In  this  case,  the  odd  numbers  will  shorten 
the  step,  so  that  the  even  numbers  may  precede  Them 

en  the  line.  The  captain  placed  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank,  and  the  left  guide,  will  return  to  their 
places  in  lino  of  battle,  by  order  of  the  instructor,  after 
th<>  company  shall  be  formed  and  aligned.. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend 
the  mechanism  of  this  movement,  the  instructor  will 
at  first  eause  it  to  be  executed  separately  by  each 
rank  doubled,  and  afterwards  by  the  two  ranks  united 
and  doubled. 

15&.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  line 
of  battle,  and  without  the  point  where  the  right  or 
left  is  to  rest,  in  order  to  establish  the  base  of  the 
alignment,  and  afterwards  he  will  follow  up  the 
movement  to  assure  himself  that  each  file  conforms 
itself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  149. 

Article  Fifth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to 
form  it  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into 
line,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and 
left  in  marching. 

153.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  right 
flank,  the  instructor  will  order  the  captain  to  form  it 
into  line;  the  captain  will  immediately  command: 

1.  By  company,  into  line.    2.  March. 


1 34        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IV. 

154.  At  the  command  march,  the  covering  sergeant 
will  continue  to  march  Straight  forward;  the  men 
will  advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  the  double  quick 
step  and  move  into  line,  by  the  shortest  route,  taking 
care  to  undouble  the  files,  and  to  come  on  the  Hue' 
one  alter  the  other. 

155.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in 
line  with  the  covering  sergeant,  they  will  take  from 
him  the  step,  and  then  turn  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

156.  The' men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the 
movements  of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but  with- 
out endeavoring  to  arrive  in  line  at  the  same  time  with 
the  latter. 

157.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  cap- 
tain will  face  tohis  company  in  order  to  follow  up  the 
execution;  and  as  soon  as  the  company  is  formed,  he 
will  command,  guide  left,  place  himself  two  paces 
before  the  centre,-face  to  the  front,  and  take  the  step 
of  the  company. 

158.  At  the  command  guide  left,  the  second  sergeant 
will  promptly  place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the 
left,  to  serve  as  guide,  and  the  covering  sergeant  who 
is  on  the  opposite  flank  will  remain  there. 

159.  When  the  company  inarches  by  the  left  flank, 
this  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands, and  according  to  the  same  principles  j  the  com- 
pany being  formed',  the  captain  will  command  guide 
riafit,  and  place  himself  in  front  of  his  company  as 
above;  the  covering  aergeant  who  is  on  the  right  of 
the  front  rank  will  serve  as  guide,  and  the  second 
sergeant  placed  on  the  left  flank  will  remain  there. 


SCHOOL  OF  THIS  COMPANY— LESSON  IV.         125 

160.  Thus  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left  in 
front,  the  covering  sergeant  ami  the  second  sergeant 
<if  each  company  will  always  be  placed  on  the  right, 
and  left,  respectively  of  the  front  rank;  they  will  be 
denominated  rtght  guide  and  left  guide,  and  the  one  or 
the  other  Charged  with  the  direction. 

161  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if 
it  he  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  cause  it  to  to rm 
platoons,  he  will  give  an  order  to  that  effect  to  the 
captain,  who  will  command: 

1.  By  platoon,  into  line.     2.  March. 

162.  This  movement  will  ber executed  by  each  pla- 
toon according  to  the  above  principles.  The  captain 
will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon, 
and  the  first  lieutenant  before  the  centre  ofthe  second, 
passing  through  the  Opening  made  in  the  centre  ofthe 
company,  if  the  march  be  by  the  right  flank,  and 
around  the  left  of  this  platoon,  if  the  march  bo  by  the 
left;  in  this  last  case,  the  captain  will  also  pass  around 
flic  left  of  the  second  platoon  in  order  to  place  himself 
in  front  of  the  first.  Both  the  captain  and  lieutenant, 
without  waiting  for  each  other,  will  command  guide 
left  (or  right,)  at  the  instant  their  respective  platoons 
are  formed.  .,. 

Ift?.  At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right,)  the 
guide  of  each  platoon  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  indica- 
ted flank  of  the  platoon,  if  not  already  there. 

1G4.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  always 
serve  as  the  guide  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  first  pla- 
toon, and  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  serve  in 
like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon. 


126        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COM^NY— LES60N  IV. 

16f>.  Tim?  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will  be 
but  one  guide  to  each  platoon;  bo  will  always  be 
placed  on  its  left  ilank,  if  tlio  righij  be  in  trout,  and 
od  tbe  rigbt  llauk,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

166.  In  these  movements,  tbe  lib-  closers  will  fol- 
low the  platoons  to  which  they  are  attached.      . 

- 

167.  The  instructor^nay  cause  the  company,  march- 
ing by  the  flank,  to  form  by  company,  or  by  platoon, 
into  line,  by  his  own  direct  commands,  using  rhose 
prescribed  by  the  captain,  No,  153  or  161. 

168.  The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  iu 
passing,  without  a  halt,  from  the  march  by  the  front 
to  the  march  by  the  ilank,  and  reciprocally.  In  either 
case,  he  will  employ  the  commands  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  363,  substituting  company  for 
squad.  The  company  will  face  to  the  righr  or  [pit,  in 
marching,  and  the  captain,  the  guides,  and  tile  closers 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  each 
in  the  march  by  the  flank,  or  in  the  march  by  the  front 
of  a  company  supposed  tube  a  subdivision  of  a  column. 

169.  If,  after. vfacing  to  the  right  or  left,  in  march- 
ing, the  company  find  itself  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
the  captain  will  place  himself  two  paces  behind  the 
centre  of  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  the  guides 
will  pass  to  the  rear  rank,  now  leading,  and  the  file 
closers  will  march  in  the  front  of  this  rank. 

170.  The  instructor,  iu  order  to  avoid  fatiguing  the 
men,  ami  to  prevent  them  from  being  negligent  in  tbe 


r~ 


EfOOE  OF  THE  C0MPANY--LES80N  V.     •  107 

position  of  shoulder  arnis,  will  sometimes  order  sup- 
port arms  in  inarching  bj  tho. flank,  and  arms  on  the 
right  shoulder,  when  marching  in  line. 


LESSON  FIFTH. 

Article  First. 

To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either  at  a 
half  or  in  a  march.  ,• 

171.  The  company  being  ata  halt,  in  line  of  battle. 
the  instructor,  wishing  to  break  it  info  column,  by 
platood  to  the  right,  will  command: 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

17*2.  At  the.  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoons- 
will  rapidly  place  flhemselvea  two  paces  before  the 
centres  of  their  respective  platoons,  the  lieutenant 
passing  around  the  left  of  the  company.  They  need 
not  occupy  themselves  with  dressing,  one  upon  the 
other.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  cap- 
tain in  the  front  rank. 

.173.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank 
man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right,  the  eover- 
irgeant  standing  fast ;  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
\vi!!  move  (prickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a  little  beyond 
tiiv  point  ar  which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when 
the  wheel  shall  be  completed,  face  to  the  lite  rear,  and 
place  himself  so  that  the  line  which  he  forms  with  the 


128         SCII  OL  OP- THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

man  on  the  right  (who  had  faced,)  shall  be  perpen- 
dicular to  that  occupied  by  the  company  in  line  of 
battle;  each  platoon  will  wheel  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot, 
and  when  the  man  who*  conducts  the  marching  flank 
shall  approach  to  near  the  perpendicular,  its  chief 
will  command  : 


1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 

174.  At  the  command  hilt,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank 
shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  perpendic- 
ular, the  platoon  will  halt;  the  covering  sergeant  will 
move  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  is 
to  rest,  passing  by  the  front  rank:  the  second  sergeant 
will  place  himself,  in  like  manner,  in  respect  to#  the 
second  platoon.  Each  will  take  care  to  leave  between 
himself  and  the  man  on  the  right  of  his  platoon,  a 
space  equal  to  its  front;  the  captain  and  first  lieuten- 
ant will  look  to  this,  and  each  take  care  to  align  the 
sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon 
who  had  faced  to  the  right. 

175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon  being  thus  estab- 
lished on  the  perpendicular,  each  chief  will  place  him- 
self two  paces  out  side  of  his  guide,  and  facing  to- 
wards him,  will  command: 

3.  Left— Dress. 

176.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of 
toon   will  command,   FRONT,   and  place  himself  two 
paces  before  its  centre. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.  120 

177.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the 
movement  of  their  respective  platoons,  preserving  al- 
ways  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear   rank. 

i 78.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the 
left,  according  to  the  same  principles.  The  instruc- 
tor will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  left  ichccl.     2.  March. 

179.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the 
same  manner  as  breaking  by  platoon  to  the  right. 

.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank 
m  in  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  pla- 
toons will  wheel  t<>  the  left,  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot;  the 
chiefs  of  platoop  will  conform  to  the  principles  indi- 
cated Nos.  173  and  174. 

181,  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of 
each  platoon,  the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  first  platoon,  and  second  sergeant 
near  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  will  each  move  to 
the  points  where  the  right  of  the  platoon  is  to  rest. 
The  chief  of  each  platoon  should  be  careful  to  align 
tin'  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  pla- 
toon who  had  laced  to  the  left,  and  will  then  command : 

Right— Dress. 

..  The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon will  command,  Front,  and  place  himself  oppo- 
site its  centre. 


130         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSEN  V. 

183.  The  instructor  witting  to  break  the  company 
by  platoon  to  the  right,  and  to  move  the  column  for- 
ward after  the  wije*!  is  completed,  \\\\l  caution  the 
company  to  that  effect,  and  command  ; 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.     '2.  March. 

184.  At  Hie  first  command,  the  chief*  of  platoon  wil  1* 
move  rapidly  in  front  of  their  respective  platoons, 
conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  1 7"J .  and 
will  remain' in  this  position  during  the  continuant 

the  wheel.    The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the 
cliief  of  the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to  the  principles  berfe- 
irfprescribed  :  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  not  face  to 
the  right,  but, will  mark  time,  conforming  himself  to 
the  movement  of  the  marching  flank  ;  and  when  the 
man  wTho  is  ofi  the  left  of  this  flank  shall  arrive  near 
the  perpendicular,  the  instructor  will  command : 

3.  Fortcard.\  4.  March.     5.  Guide  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  begivenat 

the  instant  the  wheel  is  complete.!,  the  platoons  will 
move  straight  to  the  front,  all  the  men  taking  the 
step  of  twenty-eight  inches.  The  covering  serf 
and  the  second  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  tl. 
of  their  respective  platoons,  the  former  passing  be- 
fore the  front  rank.  The  leading  guide  will  imme- 
diately take  points  on  the  ground  in  the  direction 
which  may  be  indicated  to  him  by  the  instructor. . 


SCHOOL  Of  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.         131 

1-7.  At  the  fifth  commandthe  men  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  lightly  to  the  left. 

.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose 
his  distance,  or  the  line  of  direction,  he  will  conform 
to  the  principles  Derek)  prescribed  Nos.  '2U2  and  803. 

L89.  If  ih"  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the 
front,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  break  by  platoon 
t<>  the  right  by  the  same  commands.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in  tin1  manner 
already  explained;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  take 
care  to  mark  time  in  his- place,  without  advancing  or 
receding;  the  instructor,  the  chief's  of  platoon,  and 
the  guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
Nos.  184  and  following. 

1!)0.  The  company  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to 
the  left  according  to  tb€  same  principles,  and  by  in- 
verse means,  the  instructor  giving  the  commands  pre- 
scribed Nos.  183  and  185,  substituting  left  for  right, 
and  reciprocally, 

191.  The  movements  explained  in  Nos.  183  and  189 
will  pnly  be  executed  alter  the  company  has  become 
weir  established  in  tin1  principles  of  the* march  in  col- 
umn, Article  Second  and  Third. 


Remarks. 


10-2.  The  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  company, 
will  observe  whether  the  movement  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed- above ;  whether 
the  platoons,  after  break'ingMnto  column,  are  perpen- 
dicular to  the  line  ofba&lejust  occupied  ;  and  whether 
the   guide,  who  placed  himself  where  the  marching 


m         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

flank  of  his  platoon  bad  to  rest,  has  left,  between  him- 
self  and  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right,  (or  left,)  the 

space    necessary  to  contain  the    front  of  the  platoon. 

193..  After  the  platoons  have  broken,  if  the  rear- 
most guide  should  not'  accurately  cover  the  leading 
one,  he  will  not  seek  to  correct  his  position  till  the 
column  he  put  in  march,  unless  the  instructor,  wish- 
ing to  wheel  immediately  into  line,  should  think  it 
necessary  to  rectify  thedirection  of  the  guides,  which 
would  be  executed  as  will  he  hereinafter  explained  in 
Article  Fifth  of  this  lesson. 

t94.  The  instructor  will  observe,  that  the  man  on 
the  right  (or  left,)  of  each  platoon,  who,  at  the  com- 
mand miirrli,  faces  to  the  right  (or  left)  being  the  true 
pivot  of  the  wheel,  the  front  rank  man  next  to  him 
ought  to  gain  a  little  ground  to  the  front  in  wheeling, 
60  as  to  clear  the  pivot  man. 


Article  Second. 


"*o  march  in  column. 


195.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right 
(or  left)  in  front,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the 
column  to  march,  will  throw-  himself  twenty-live  or 
thirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  guides,  place  himself 
correctly  on  their  direction,  and  caution  the  leading 
guide  to  take  points  on  the  ground. 

196.  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the' guide  of 
the    leading    platoon    will    take  two  points  on.    the 


SCOHOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LESSON  V.         133 

ground  in  the  straight  line  passing  between  his  own 
and  the  heels  of  bis  instructor. 

1 5)7.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  step  aside,  and.  command  : 

1.  Column  foncard.     2.   0 aide  left  (or  right.) 
3.  March. 

198.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will 
lead  off,  by  a  decided  step,  their  respective  platoons, 
in  order  that  the  whole  may  move  smartly  and  at  the 
same  moment. 

199.  The  men  will  each  feel-lightly  the  elbow  of  his 
neighbor  towards  the  guide,  and  conform  himself,  in 
marching,  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  Soldier  No.  387.     The  man  next  to  the  guide, 

.in  each  platoon,  will  take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and 
also  to  march  always  about  six  inches  to  the  right  (or 
left)  from  him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out  of  the 
direction. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the 
greatest  precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step, 
and  maintain  the  direction  of  his  inarch  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  89. 

201.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the 
traee  of  the  leadingxme,  preserviiri:  between  the  lat- 
ter and  himself  a  distance  precisely  equal  to  the  front 
of  his  platoon,  and  marching  in  the  same  step  with 
the  leading  guide. 

202.  If  the  following  guide  lose  his  distance  from 
the  one  leading,  (which  can  only  happen  by  his  own 
fault,)  he  will  correct  himself  by  slightly  lengthening 


134         SCHOOL  OF  Tlil'  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

or  shortening  a  few  Bte^s,  in  order  that  there  may  not 
be  sudden  quickeoiugB  or  slackenings  in  the  march  of 
his  platoon.; 

203.  If  the  game  guide  having  tiegleeted to'  march 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  find  bin 
sensibly  QUt  ot  the  direelion,  he.  will  remedy  this  limit* 
by  advancing  more  or  less  Hie  shoulder  opposite  W 
true  direction,  and  thus,  in  a  few  steps,  insensibly  re- 
gain it,  without  the  inconvenience  of  the  oblique  Btep, 
which   would  cause  a  toss  of  distance.     In  .-ill  cases 
each  (duel'  of  platoon  will  euuse  it  to  conform  to  the 
movements  of  jits  guide* 


Remarks  on  the  march  in  cohthm. 

5834;  If  the  ehiefs  and  guides  of  subdivisions  neglect 

to  lead  off  and  to  decide  the  march  from  the  first 

the  inarch  will  he  begun  in.  uncertainty,  which   will 

cause  waverings,  a  loss  of  step,  and  a  loss  of  distance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  unequal  steps,  the 
march  of  his  subdivision,  ajidthat  which  follows',  will 
be  uncertain  ;  there  will  be  undulations,  quickeniiigs 
and  slackenings  in  the  march. 

206.  If  the  same  guide  he  not  habituated  to  prolong 
a  given  direction,  without  deviation,  he  will  describe 
a  crooked  line,  and  the  column  must  wind  to  conform 
itself  to  such  line. 

207.  If  the  following  guide  be  not  habituated  to 
inarch  in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  he  will  lose 
his  distance  at  every  moment  in  endeavors  to  regain 
the  trace,  the  preservation  of  which  is  the  most  \\\\- 
portant  principle  in  the  march -in  column. 


:■'.    I    !    J_.LJ_LJ_J_1_J 


t^LL-J-JL-J-L-L-LIZO 
Li_L  J_1_I_LJL-L-LJ       , 


J-l— L-LJ— IT 


m     □ 


- 


-i 


i 


■' 


E3 


CD  . 

B        S    ^U, 

_ 

n 

<Z  j^W 

- 

- 

- 

:  q 

■is^r      ^ 

- 

_      D 

- 

- 

j»^ 

-D 

h: 

HI 

- 

,#"  e> 

- 

- 

:  <ri 

x 

- 

-      [T 

- 

- 

— y 

..... 

•')()L  OF    lflE   COMPANY— LESSON  V.  135 

4 
20-.  The  guide  of  each  .subdivision  m  column  will 
bo  responsible  for  the  direction*  distance,  and  step; 
the  .chief  of  the  subdivision,  tor  the  order  and  confor- 
mity of  his  subdivision  with  the  movements  of  the 
guide.  A.-cordingly,  the  chief  will  frequently  turn, 
in  the  inarch,  to  observe  his  subdivision. 

'.  The  instructor  placed  cm  the  flani  ofthe  guides', 

will  watch   over  the   execution  of  all  the   principles  . 

prescribed;  he  will  also,  Sometimes  place  himself  in 

.  the  p'ar,  align  himself  on  the  guides,  and  halt,  pend- 

me  thirty  paces  together,  to  verify  the  accuracy 

of.the  guides. 

10.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivisions  will  always 
repeat,  with  the  greatest  promptitude,  the  commands, 
march  -And /mil,  no  chief  waiting  tor  another,  but  each 
repeating  the  Command  the  moment  he  catches  itfrom 
the  instructor.  They  will  repent  no  other- command 
gjven  by  him;  but  will  explain,  if  necessary,  to  their 
subdivisions,  in  an  under  tone  of  voice,  what  they  will 
have  to  execute,  as  indicated  by  the  commands  of 
caution. 


Article  Tlhrd. 


To  change  direction. 


2.1  J.  The  change  of  direction  of  a  column  while 
marching,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  wheeling  ou  the  march.  Whenever, 
therefore,   a  column   in   to.  change  direction,   the  in- 


138  SCHOOL  OF  THE  C   MPANY— J.i:sS«-N  V 

s 

structor  will  change  the  guide,  if  not  already  there,  to 
the  flank  opposite  the  side  to  which  the  change  is  to 
be  made. 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  it 
be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  change  the  direction 
to  the  right,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon,  and  immediately  go  himself,  or  send  a 
marker  to  the  point  at  which  the  change  of  direction 
is  to  be  made;  the  instructor,  or  marker,  will  place 
himself  oo  the  direction  of  the  guides,  so  as  to  present 
the  breast  to  that  flank  of  the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  inarch  on 
that  person,  so  that,  in  passing,  his  left  arm  may  just 
graze  his  breast.  When  the  leading  guide  shall  have 
approached  near  to  the  marker,  the  chief  of  his  pla- 
toon will  command : 

J.  Right  wheel.     2.  March. 

214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
platoon  is  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  the 
marker. 

215.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pro- 
nounced at  the  instant  the  guide  shall  have  arrived 
opposite  the  marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
ot°the  soldier,  No.  396. 

216.  The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each 
platoon  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  MARCH. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  exe- 
cuted as  is  prescribed  in  tin-  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY— LESSON  V.         137 

398  and  309.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  take 
points  on  the  ground  in  the  new  direction,  in  order 
the  better  to  regulate  the  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  retake  the  direct  inarch  by 
the  same  commands  and  the  same  means  which  gov- 
erned the  first  platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the 
left,  he  will  command,  guide  right.  At  this  command, 
the  two  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  their 
respective  platoons,  each  passing  iu  front  of  his  sub- 
division; the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  right ;  the  instructor  will  afterwards  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  212. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the 
change  of  direction  to  the  right,  but  by  inverse  means. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed, 
the  instructor  will  command,  guide  left. 

.  222.  The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in 
front,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples. 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time* 
the  platoons  will  wheel  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  404. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  forma- 
tions in  line,  which  can  be  executed  only  by  taming 

10* 


138 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 


to  the  right  or  the  left,  the  instructor  will  sometimes 
cause  the  column  to  change  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide.  In  this  cute,  (he  chief  of  the  leading  pla- 
toon will  command:  Left  (or  right)  (urn,  instead  of 
left  (or  right)  wheel.  The  subdivisions  will  each  turn, 
in  succession,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402.  The  tedding  guide,  as 
soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on  the  ground, 
the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march. 

225.  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve 
distances  and  the  direction,  that  all  the  subdivisions 
of  the  column  should  change  direction  precisely  at  the 
point  where  the  leading  subdivision  changed  ;  it  is  for 
this  reason  that  that  point  ought  to  be  marked  in  ad- 
vance, and  that  it  is  prescribed  that  the  guides  direct 
their  march  on  the  marker,  also  that,  each  chief  of 
subdivision  shall  not  cause  the  change  to  commence 
till  the  guide  of  his  subdivision  has  grazed  the  breast 
of  this  marker. 

226.  Each  chief  will  take  care  that  his  subdivision 
arrives  at  the  point  of  change  in  a  square  wdth  the  line 
of  direction;  with  this  view  he  will  face  to  his  subdi- 
vision when  the  one  which  precedes  has  commenced  to 
turn  or  to  wheel,  and  he'will  be  watchful  that  it  con- 
tinues to  march  squarely  uutil  it  arrives  at  the  point 
where  the  change  of  direetion  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  the  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of  the 
subdivision  which  wheels  should  not  clear  the  wheel- 
ing point,  the  next  subdivision  would  be  arrested  and 
distances  lost ;  for  the  guide  who  conducts  the  march- 
ing flank  having  to  describe  an  arc,  in  length,  about  a 
half  greater  than  the  front   of  the  subdivision,  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY- LESSON  V.         139 

second  subdivision  would  be  already  up  with  the 
wheeling  point,  whilst  the  first  which  wheels  has  yet 
the  half  of  its  front  to  execute,  and  hence  would  be 
obliged  to  mark  time  until  that  half  be  executed.  It 
is  therefore  prescribed,  that  the  pivot  of  each  subdi- 
vision should  take  steps  of  nine  Off  eleven  inches  in 
length,  according  to  the  swiftness  of  the  gait,  in  order 
not  to  arrest  the  inarch  of  the  next  subdivision.  The 
chiefs  of  subdivision  will  look  well  to  the  step  of  the 
pivot,  and  cause  his  step  to  be  lengthened  or  shorten- 
ed as  may  be  judged  necessary.  By  the  nature  of  this 
movement,  the  centre  of  each  subdivision  will  bend  a 
little  to  the  rear. 

228,  The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or  the 
cadence  of  the  step,  whether  the  change  of  direction 
be  to  the  side  of  the  guide  or  to  the  opposite  side. 

229.  The  marker,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point,  will 
always  present  his  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column. 
The  instructor  Will  take  the  greatest  pains  in  causing 
the  prescribed  principles  to  be  observed;  he  will  see 
that  each  subdivision  only  commences  the  change  of 
direction  wTheu  the  guide,  grazing  the  breast  of  the 
marker,  has  nearly  passed  him,  and  that  the  march- 
ing flank  does  not  describe  the  arc  of  too  large  a  cir- 
cle, in  order  that  it  may  not  be  thrown  beyond  the 
new  direction. 


230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel,  the  guide  of 
the  wheeling  flank  will  cast  an  eye  over  the  ground 
at  the  moment  of  commencing  the  wheel,  and  will  de- 
scribe an  arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  equal  to  the 
front  of  the  subdivision. 


140      school  of  the  company— lesson  v. 
Article  Fourth.    . 

To  halt  the  column. 


231.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  instruc- 
tor shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Column.     2.  Halt. 

232.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  column  will  halt;  the  guides 
will  also  stand  fast,  although  they  may  have  lost  both 
distance  and  direction. 

233.  If  the  command  halt,  be  not  i-epeated  with  the 
greatest  vivacity,  and  executed  at  the  same  instant, 
distances  will  be  lost. 

234.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to 
recover  it  after  that  command,  he  will  only  throw  his 
fault  on  the  following  guide,  who,  if  he  have  marched 
well,  will  no  longer -be  at  his  proper  distance  ;  and  if 
the  latter  regain  what  he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement 
will  be  propagated  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the 
right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at 
a  halt  or  on  the  march. 

235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  column, 
right  in  front,  and  wishing  to    form   it  into  line  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.        141 

battle,  will  place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front 
of  the  leading  guide,  face  t  i  him,  and  rectify,  if  neces- 
sary, the  position  of  the  guide  beyond ;  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command  : 


Left— Dress. 

236.  At  this  command,  which  will  not  be  repeated 
by  the  chief^of  platoon,  each  of  them  will  place  him- 
self briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct 
the  alignment  of  the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the 
direction  of  the  column. 

237.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will 
command  Front,  and  return  quickly  to  his  place  in 
column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  command  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel*      2.  March, 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  left 
of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  -and  place  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  bis  side, 
who  stands  fast ;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on 
the  principle  of  wheels  from  a  halt,  and  in  conformity 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  194.  Each  chief  will  turn 
to  his  platoon  to  observe  its  movement,  and  when  the 
inarching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 


142       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

240.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  tho 
marching  Hunk  of  the'platoon  is  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle. 

_  24].  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having  halted 
it,  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file. closer,  passing 
around  the  left  of  his  subdivision. 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon, 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  point,  at  which  the  right  of 
the  company  will  rest  in  line  of  battle,  and  command  : 

Right— Dress. 

243.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress 
up  on  the  alignment ;  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right 
of  the  leading  platoon,  who  finds  himself  opposite  the 
instructor  established  on  the  direction  of  the  guides, 
will  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of 
this  officer.  The  captain  will"  direct  the  alignment 
from  the  right  on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the 
company. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command : 

Front. 

245.  The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in  line  of 
battle,  will  command  : 

Guides— Posts. 

246.  At  this  command,  the  covering  "sergeant  will 
cover  the  captain,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to 
his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instruc- 
tor should  wish  to  form  it  to  the  right  into  line  of  bat 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LESSON  V.         113 

tie,  he  will  place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front 
of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  neces- 
sary, the  position  of  the  guide  beyoiid;  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command: 

1.  Right  into  line,  wheel.    2.  March. 

248.  At  the  command  march,  tho-front  rank  man  on 
the  right  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right  and 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  the 
guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast ;  each  platoon  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  will  be  halted  by  its  chief 
when  the  marching  flank  has  approached  near  the 
Hue  of  battle;  for  this  purpose,  the  chief  of  each  pla- 
toon will  command : 

1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 

249.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  when  the 
marching  flank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having 
halted  his  platoon,  will  resume  his  place  in  the  rank 
of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon, 
will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the 
company  will  rest,  and  command:* 

Left— Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress 
up  on  the  alignment ;  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  se- 
cond platoon,  opposite  the  instructor,  will  place  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  officer,  and  ' 
the  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from  the  left  on 
the  man  of  the  opposite  flank  of  the  company. 


144        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

252.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command : 

Front. 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command : 

Guides— Posts. 

_  254.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  to  the 
right  of  his  company,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
him,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  a 
file  closer. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command  left  or 
right  dress,  previous  to  commanding  left  or  right  into 
line,  wheel,  unless  after  rectifying  the  position  of  the 
guides,  it  should  become  necessary  to  dress  the  pla- 
toons, or  one  of  them,  laterally  to  the  right  or  left. 

256.  The  instructor,  before  the  command  left  (or 
right)  iyto  line  wheel,  will  assure  himself  that  the 
rearmost  platoon  is  at  its  exact  wheeling  distance  from 
the  one  in  front.  This  attention  is  important,  in  order 
to  detect  negligence  on  the  part  of  guides  in  this 
essential  point.  ■ 

257.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed No.  238,  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance 
in  front  of  the  leading  guide. 

258.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt  short,  the 
instructor,  the  chief's  of  platoon,  and  the  platoons  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  239  and  following. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.  145 

259.  If  the  column  bo  in  march,  left  in  front,  this 
formation  will  be  made  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, and  by  inverse  means. 

260.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without 
halting  the  column,  and  to  march  the  company  in  line 
to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 


1.  By  platoons,  left  ichccl.    2.  March. 

261.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt ;  the  man 
next  to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon  will  mark  time; 
the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the 
principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  When  the 
right  of  the  platoons  shall  arrive  near  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  instructor  will  command: 


3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide   right   (or  left.) 

262.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,  all  the  men  of  the  company 
will  move  off  together,  with  the  step  of  twenty  eight 
inches ;  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left  guide  will  take  their 
positions  as  in  line  of  battle. 

263.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given  im- 
mediately after  the  fourth,  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant,  if  not  already  there,  will  move  briskly  to  the 
side  on  which  the  guide  is  designated.  The  non-cam- 
missioned  officer  charged'with  the  direction  will  move 


146        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 

rapidly  in  front  of  the  guide, and  will  be  assured  in  his 
line  of  march  by  the  instructor,  as  is  prescribed  No. 
104.  That  non-commissioned  officer  will  immediately 
take  points  on  the  ground  as  indicated  in  the  same 
dumber.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  side  of  the  guide,  conforming  themselves  to  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  liue. 

264.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column 
left  in  front. 


LESSON    SIXTH. 

Article  First. 

To  hreak  the  company  into  platoons,  and  to 
reform  the  company. 

To  break  the  comp>any  into  platoons. 

265.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  step, 
and  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  break  by 
platoon,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command:  L  Break  into  platoons,  and  immediately 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 

266.  At  the  command,  break  into  -platoons,  the  first 
lieutenant  will  pass  quickly  around  the  left  to  the  cen- 
tre of  his  platoon,  and  give  the  caution  :  Majk  time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command:  2.  March. 


id^L 


-.£<* 


£9B 

:  Z2E3J3£JE3£FZjL 


•X'^r= 


.  i   ..-   ..v      : 

! 


1  L. 

" 

, 

:  • 

S3 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.        147 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  ;  the  covering  Bergeant  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  left  flankofthis  platoon  (passing  by  the 

front  rank)  as  soqii  as  the  flank  shall  be  disengaged. 

269.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain, 
the  second  platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time;  its  chief 
will  immediately  add:  1.  Right 'oblique.  2.  Maimii. 
The  last  command  will  be  given  so  that  this  platoon 
may  commence  obliquing  the  instant  the  rear  rank  of 
the  first  platoon  shall  have  passed.  The  men  will 
shorten  the  step  in  obliquing,  so  that  when  the  com- 
mand forward  march  is  given,  the  platoon  may  have 
its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near  the 
direction  of  the  guide  of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the 
second  will  command  Foricard,  and  add  March,  the 
instant  that  the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover  the 
guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will 
break  into  platoons  by  inverse  means  applying  to  th<' 
first  platoon  all  that  has  been  prescribed  for  the  se- 
cond and  reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will 
shift  to  the  right  flank  of  the  second  platoon,  and  the 
covering  sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right  of  the  first. 

To  reform  the  company. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right 
in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
form  company,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain, 
who  will  command:  Form  covipauy. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will 


143        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 
immediately  add  :  1.  First  platoon ;  2.  Right  ohlique. 

275.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it 
to  continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

276.  The  captain  will  then  command:  3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by.  the  chief  of  the, 
second,  the  first  platoon  will  oblique  to  the  right,  in 
order  to  unmask  the  second ;  the  covering  sergeant, 
on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to  the  right 
of  the  company,  passing  by  the  front  rank. 

278.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  un- 
masked the  second,  the  captain  will  command : — 
T.  Mark  time,  and  at  the  instant  the  umasking  shall 
be  complete,  he  will  add:  2.  March.  The  first  pla- 
will  then  cease  to  oblique,  and  mark  time. 

279.  In  the  mean  time  the  second  platoon  will  have 
continued  to  march  straightforward,  and  when  it  shall 
be  nearly  up  with  the  first,  the  captain  will  command 
Forward,  and  at  the  instant  the  two  platoons  shall 
unite,  add  March  ;  the  first  platoon  will  then  ce#se 
to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  movement 
will'be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the 
second  platoon,  giving  the  command  Forward,  and  the 
captain  adding  the  command  March,  when  the  pla- 
toons are  united. 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right, 
will  pass  to  its  left  flank  the  moment  the  platoon  be- 
gins to  oblique  ;  the  guide  of  the  first  on  its  right,  re- 
maining on  that  flank  of  the  platoon. 

282.  The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause  the 
company  to  break  and  reform,  by  platoon,  by  his  own 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.        .149 

direct  commands.  In  this  case,  he  will  give  the  gen- 
eral commands  prescribed  for  ihe  capt  lin  above : 
1.'  Break  into  platoons;  2.  March;  and  1.  Form 
Company;  2.  March. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons,  the 
subdivision  that  breaks  off  should  mark  time  too  long, 
it  might,  in  a  column  of  many  subdivisions,  arrest  the 
march  of  the  following  one,  which  would  cause  a 
lengthening  of  the  column  and  a  loss  of  distances. 

284.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  necessary  that 
the  platoons  whi  h  oblique  snould  not  shorten  the  step 
too  much,  in  order  not  to  lose  distance  in  column, 
and  not  to  arrest  the  march  of  the  following  subdivi- 
sion. 

285.  If  a  platoon  obliques  too  far  to  a  flank,  it 
would  be  obliged  to  oblique  again  to  the  opposite 
flank  to  regain  the  direction,  and  by  the  double  move- 
ment arrest,  probably,  the  march  of  the  following 
subdivision. 

286.  The  chiefs  of  these  platoons  which  oblique  will 
face  to  their  platoons,  in  order  to  enforce  the  observ- 
ance of  the  foregoing  principles. 

287.  When,  in  a  column  of  several  companies,  they 
break  in  succession,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance 
that  each  company  should  continue  to  march  in  the 
same  step,  without^  shortening  or  slackening,  whilst 
that  which  precedes  breaks,  although  the  foHowing 
company  should  close  up  on  the  preceding  one.  This 
attention  is  essential  to  guard  against  an  elongation  of 
the  column. 

283.  Faults  of  but  little  moment,  in  a  column  of  a 
few  companies,  would  be  serious  inconveniences  in  a 
general  column  of  many  battalions.     Hence  the  in- 


150        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LESSOM  VI. 

structor.  will  give  the  greatest  care  in  causing  all  the 
prescribed  principles  to  be  strictly  observed.  To  this 
end,  be  will  hold  himself  on  the  directing  flank,  the 
better  to  observe  all  the  movements. 


Article  Skconm. 

Being  in  column,  to  break  files  to  the  rear, 
and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 


289.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of. a  column,  right  (or  left)  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  files  to 
break  off  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who 
will  immediately  turn  to  his  company,  and  command : 

1.    Two  files  from  left  (or  right)  to.  rear.     2.  March. 

290.  At  the  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the 
left  (or  right)  of  the  company  will  mark  time,  the 
others  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  ;  the 
two  rear  rank  men  of  these  files  will,  as  soon  as  the 
rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  move  to 
the  right  by  advancing  the  outer  shoulder ;  the  odd 
number  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file  from 
that  flank,  the  even  number  behind  the  fourth,  pass- 
ing for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd  number;  the  two 
front  rank  men  will,  in  like  manner,  move  to  the  right 
when  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them, 
the  odd  number  will  place  himself  behind  the  first  file, 


##                                           y^,t. 

A 

A 

»                 ■■          ± 

gaum 

^ 

■ 

□>       E 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.         151 

the  even  number  behind  the  second  file,  passing  for 
this  purpose  behind  the  odd  number.  If  the  files  are 
broken  from  the  right,  the  men  will  move  to  the  left, 
advancing  the  outer  shoulder,  the  even  number  of  the 
rear  rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the 
odd  Dumber  df  the  same  rank  behind  the  fourth;  the 
even  number  of  the  front  rank  behind  the  first  file, 
the  odd  number  of  tin1  same  rank  behind  the  second, 
the  odd  numbers  for  this  purpose  passing  behind  the 
even  numbers*  The  men  will  be  careful  not  to  lose 
their  distances  and  to  keep  aligned. 

891.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  still  to  break  two 

files  from  the  .same  side,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
captain,  who  will  proceed  as  above  directed. 

29S.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain, 
the  tiles  already  broken,  advancing  9  little  the  outer 
shoulder,  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  to  the  right, 
it'  the  files  arc  broken  frotn  the  left,  and  to  the  left,  if 
the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  shortening  at  the 
same  time  the  step,  in  order  to  make  room  between 
themselves  and  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  for  the 
files  last  ordered  to  the  rear;  the  latter  will  break  by 
the  same  commands  audio  the  same  manner  as  the 
first.  The  men  who  double  should  increase  the  length 
of  the  step,  in  order  to  prevent  distances  from  being 
lost. 

29&  The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the  front  of 
a  company  by  breaking  ofF  successive  groups  of  two 
files,  but  the  new  files  must  always  be  broken  from 
the  same  side. 

294  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  files  broken 
olF  to  return  into  line,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
captain,  who  will  immediately  command  : 


li-2      SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 
1.   Tico  files  into  line.    2.  March. 

295.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  of 
those  marching  by  the  flank  will  return'  briskly  into 
line,  and  the  o'thers  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files 
by  advancing  the  inner  shoulder  towards  the  flank  to 
which  they  belong. 

296.  'The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  watch 
the  observance  of  the  principles  which  have  just  been 
prescribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two 
files  to  break  one  after  another,  and  to  return  again 
into  line,  will  afterwards  cause  two  or  three  groups  to 
break  together,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command: 
Four  or  six  files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear  ;  March. 
The  files  designated  will  mark  time;  each  rank  will 
advance  a  little  the  outer  shoulder  as  soon  as  the  rear 
rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  it,  will  oblique  at 
once,  and  each  group  will  place  itself  behind  the  four 
neighboring  files,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  the 
movement  had  been  executed  group  by  group,  taking 
care  that  the  distances  are  preserved. 

298.  The  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain  to 
cause  two  or  three  groups  to  be  brought  into  line  at 
once,  who  turning  to  the  company  will  command  : 

Four  or  six  files  into  line — March. 

299.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  designated 
will  advance  the  inner  shoulder,  move  up  and  form  on 
the  flank  of  tho  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 


SCHOOL  QF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.  153 

300.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  th© 
guide  on  that  flank  will  gradually  close  on  the  nearest 
front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  ajid  he  will  aho 
open  out  to  make  room  for  files  ordered  into  line. 

3ttl.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed 
in  the  following  order:  the  left  files  as  if  the  company 
was  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  right  files 
as  if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  left  flank. 
Consequently,  whenever  there  is  on  the  right  or  left 
of  a  subdivision,  a  file  which  does  not  belong  to  a 
group,  it  wijl  be  broken  singly. 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances 
in  column  that  the  men  should  be  habituated  in  the 
schools  of  detail  to  execute  the  movements  of  this 
article  with  precision. 

303.  If  new  files  broken  off  do  not  step  well  to  the 
left  or  right  in  obliquing;  if,  when  files  are  ordered 
into  line,  they  do  not  move  up  with  promptitude  and 
precision,  in  either  case  the  following  files  will  be  ar- 
rested in  their  inarch,  and  thereby  cause  the  column 
to  be  Jengtheued  out. 

304.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank 
from  which  the  files  are  broken,  to  assure  himself  of 
the  exact  observance  of  the  principles. 

305.  Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of 
direction,  in  order  that  the  whole  company  may  easily 
pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 


IV 


154        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-t-LESSON  VI. 

Article  Third. 

To  march  the  column  in   route,  and  to  execute 
the  movements  incident  thereto. 


306.  The   swiftness   of  flic  route   step   will  be  one 
hundred  and  ten  steps  in  a   minute;    this  suit 
will   be    habitually    maintained   in   columns  in   route, 
when  the  roads  and  ground  may  permit. 

307.  The  ooutpany  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  inarch  in  the  route 
step,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Column,  forward.     2.    Guide,  lift  (or  ri<j'tt.) 
3.  Route  step.     4.  Mauch. 

303.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  cap- 
tain, the  two  ranks  will  step  off  together  ;  the  rear 
rank  will  take,  in  marching,  by  shortening  a  few  steps, 
a  distance  of  one  pace  (twenty-eight  inches)  from  the 
rank  preceding,  which  distance  will  he  computed  from 
the  breasts  of  the  men  in  the  rear  rank,  to  the  knap- 
sacks of  the  men  in  the  front  rank.  The  men,  with- 
'out  further  command,  wiil  immediately  carry  their 
arms  at  will,  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  219.  They  will  no- longer  be  required  to  inarch  in 
the  cadence  pace,  or  with  the  same  foot,  or  to  remain 
silent*  The  files  will  inarch  at  ease  ;  but  care  will  be 
taken  to  prevent,  the  ranks  from  intermixing,  the  front 
rank  from  getting  in  advance  of  the  guide,  and  the, 
rear  rank  from  opening  to  too  great  a  distance. 


'  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.  155 

309.  The  company  marching  iij  the  route  step,  the 
instructor  will  cause  it  to  change  direction,  which  will 
be  executed  without  fortnal  commands,  on*  a  simple 
caution  from  fcne  captain;  the  roar  rank  will  come  up 
to  change  direction  in  the  same  manner  as  the  front 
r  ink.  Each  rank  will  conform  itself,  although  in  the 
route  ptep4,  to  the  principles  which  have  been  pre-' 
scribed  for  the  change  in  (dosed  ranks,  with  this  dif- 
ference only,  that  the  pivot  man.  instead  of  taking 
steps  of  nine,  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in 
order  to  clear  the   wheeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to 
cause  it  to  pass  to  the  cad.en.ced  step,  the  instructor 
will  first  order  pieces  to  he  brought  to  the  right  shoul- 
der, and  then  command  : 


1.   Close  order.      2.  March. 

'.'>l  1.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume 
the  cadencedi  step,  and  will  (dose  so  as  to  leave  a  dis- 
tance of  sixteen  inches  between  each  rank. 

312.  The  company  marching  In  the  caden.ced  pace, 
the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  take  the  route  step,  will 
command  : 

1.  Route  step.     2.  Margh. 

313.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  will 
continue  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  the  rear  rank 
will  take,  by  gradually  shortening  the  step,  the  dis- 
tance of  twenty  eight  inches  from  the  front  rank;  the 
men  will  carry  their  arms  at  will. 


15C  SCHOOL  OF  THE  C   MP  ANY— LESSON  VI. 

314,  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route  step, 
and  the  instructor  should  suppose  the  necessity  of 
marching  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  he  will 
command  : 


1.   Company  by  the  right,  (or  left)  flank.      2.   By  file 
left  (or  right.)     3.  Maucii. 


315'.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right  for  left,)  in  marching,  the  captain  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  guide  who  conducts 
the  leading  flank ;  this  guide  will  wheel  immediately 
to  the  left  or  right ;  all  the  files  will  come  in  succes- 
sion to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  as  the  guide  ;  if  there 
be  files  broken  off  to  the  rear,  they  will,  by  wheeling, 
regain  their  respective  places,  and  follow  the  move- 
ment of  the  company. 

316  The  instructor  having  caused  the  company  to 
be  again  formed  into  line,  will  exercise  it  in  increas- 
ing and  diminishing  front,  by  platoon,  which  will  be 
executed^  by  the  same  commands,  and  the  same  means, 
as  if  the  company  were  marching  in  the  cadenced 
step.  When  the  company  breaks  into  platoons,  the 
chief  of  each  will  move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon, 
and  will  take  the  place  of  the  guide,  who  will  step 
back  into  the  rear  rank. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and 
supposed  to  inarch  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor 
can  cause  the  front  to  be  diminished  -and  increased" 
by  section,  if  the  platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  files 
or  more. 

318.  The  movements  of  diminishing  and  increasing 
front,  by  section,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.  157 

principles  indicated  for  the  same  movements  by  pla- 
toon. The  right  sections  of  platoons  will  be  com- 
manded .by  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant,  respect- 
ively ;  the  left  sections,  by  the  two  next  subalterns  in 
rank,  or,  in  their  absence,  by  sergeants. 

3.19.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  diminish  by  section, 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  com- 
mand : 


1.  Break  into  sections.     2.  MARCH. 


320.  As  soon  as  the  platoon  shall  be  broken,  each 
chief  of  section  will  place  himself  on  its  directing 
flank  in  the  front  rank>  the  guides  who  will  be  thus 
displaced,  will  fall  back  into  the  rear  rank;  the  file 
closers  will  close  up  to- within  one  pace  of  this. rank. 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  iu 
the  column  in  route,  the  movement  will  never  be  ex- 
ecuted in  the  manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be  the  front 
of  the  company.  * 

322.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  reform  pla- 
toons, he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
eommaud : 


1.  Form  platoons.     2.  March. 

323.  At  the  first  cemmand,  each  chief  of  section 
will  place  himself  before  its  centre,  and  the  guides 
will  pass  into  the  front  rank.  At  the  command  march, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed 
for  forming  company:     The  moment  the  platoons  are 


158        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 

formed,  the  chiefs  of  the  left  sections  will  return  to 
their  places  as  tile  closers 

324.  The  instructor  will  also  Cause  to  be  executed 
the  diminishing  and  increasing  front  by  files,  as  pre- 
scribed in  tbe  preceding  article,  and  in  the  same  man- 
ner, as  if  marching  in  the  cadenced  step.  When  the 
company  is  broken  into  sections,  the  subdivisions  must 
not  be  reduced  to  a  front  of  less  than  six  files,  not 
counting  the  chief  of  the  section. 

325.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or  by 
section,  the  instructor  will  cause  it,  marching  in  the 
route  step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  the  "same  direc- 
tion, by  the  commands  and  the  means  indicated,  Nos. 
314  and  315.  The  moment  the  subdivision  shall  l';;ce 
to  the  right  (or  left,)  the  first  file  of  each  will  wneel 
to  the  left  (or  right,)  in  marching  to  prolong  the  di- 
rection, and  to  unite  with  the  rear  file  of  the  subdivi- 
sion immediately  preceding.  The  file  -closers  will 
take  their  habitual  places  in  the  march  by  the  flank, 
before  the  union  of  the  subdivisions. 

326.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  undouble  the  -files, 
which  might  sometimes  be  found  necessary,  he  will 
inform  the  captain.  Who,  after  causing  the  cadenced 
step  to  be  resumed,  and  arms  to  be  shouldered  or 
supported,  will  command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  undoubk  files.     2.  March. 

•  327.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will 
continue  to  march  straight  forward,  the  even  numbers 
will  shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the  left,  will 


Z2E 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.  159 

place  themselves  promptly  behind  the  odd  numbers  ; 
the  rear  rank  will  gain  a  stepto  the  left  so  as  to- retake 

the  touch  (if  the  elbow  s  on  the  side  of  the,  front  rank. 

?y>S.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
it  will  be  the  even  numbers  w  ho  will  continue  to  march 
forward  and  the  odd  numbers  who  will  undouble. 

329.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double  tho 
files,  he  will  give  the  order  to  tho  captain,  who  will 
command  •. 


1.   In  four  ranks,  double  files.     2.  MARCH. 


330.  At  the  command  inarch,  tin1  files  will  double 
in  the  manner  as  explained,  when  the  company  faces 
by  the  right  or  the  left  flank.  The  instructor  will 
afterwards  cause  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

331.  The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this  les- 
son may  be  executed  in  double  quick  time.  The  men 
will  be  brought,  by  degrees,  to  pass  over  at  this  gait 
about  eleven  hundred  yards  in  seven  minutes. 

332.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step 
shall  halt,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the  command 
halt,  and  the  whole  will -shoulder  arms. 

383.  Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  bo 
permitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  they 
shall  find  most  convenient,  paying  attention  only  to 
holding  the  muzzles  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accidents'. 


16)        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 

Article  Fourth. 
Countermarch. 

334.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  -to 
constitute  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  countermarch,  he 
will  command : 

1.   Countermarch.    2.  Company,  right — Face.     3.  By 
file  left.      4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right,  the  two  guides  to  the  right  about;  the 
captain  will  go  to  the'right  of  his  company  and  cause 
two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  to  conduct  him. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  both  guides  will  stand 
fast ;  the  company  will  step  oft*  smartly  ;  the  first  file, 
conducted  by  the  captain,  will  wheel  around  the  right 
guide,  and  direct  its  inarch  along  the  front  rank  so 
as  to  arrive,  behind,  and  two  paces  from  the  left  guide ; 
each  file  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  the  same 
ground  around  the  right  guide  ;  the  leading  file  having 
arrived  at  a  point  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  the  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.  Company.     2.  Halt.      3.  Front.      4.  Right— 
Dress. 

337.  The  first  command  will  be  given  tit  four  paces 
from  the  point  where  the  leading  file  is  to  rest. 

333.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 
339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 


.." 


SCH'»OL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.         161 

340.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the 
right;  the  captain  will  step  two  paces  outside  of  the 
left  guide,  now  on  the  right,  and  direct  the  alignment, 
so  that  the  front  rank  may  be  enclosed  between  the 
two  guides  ;  the  company  being  aligned,  he  will  com- 
mant  Front,  aud  place  himself  before  the  centre  of 
the  company  as  if  in  column  ;  the  guides  passing  along 
the  front  rank,  will  shift  to  their  proper  places,  on 
the  right  and  left  of  that  rank. 

341.  In  a  column  by  platoon,  the  countermarch  will 
be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  aud  according  ■ 
to  the  same  principles ;    the  guide  of  each  platoon  ' 
will  face  about,  audits  chief  will  place  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  file  on  the  right,  to  conduct  it. 

U42.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch 
will  be  executed  by  inverse  commands  and  means,  but 
according  to  the  same  principles.  Thus  the  move- 
ment will  be  made  by  the  right  flank  of  subdivisions, 
if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  by  the  left  flank,  if  the  left 
be  in  front ;  in  both  cases  the  subdivisions  will  wheel 
by  file  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 


162        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LESSON  VI. 

Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,   to  form  on  the 
right,  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle. 

343.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being 
in  march,  the  instructor  wishing  to  foriri  it  on  the 
right  into  line  of  battle,  will  command: 

1.   On  the  right  into  line.      2.   Guide  right. 

344.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of  each 
platoon  will  shift  quickly  to  its  right  flank,  and  the 
men  will  touch  elbows  to  the  riffEt;  the  column  will 
continue  to  inarch  straight  forward.  • 

345.  The  instructor  having  given  the  second  com- 
mand, will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the 
right  of  the  company  ought  to  rest,  in  line,  and  place 
himself  facing  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left  which 
he  will  choose. 

346.  The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  so  chosen  that 
the  guide' of  each  platoon,  after  having  turned  to  the 
right,  may  have,  at  least,  ten  paces  to  take  before  ar- 
riving upon  that  line. 

347.  The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly  opposite 
to  the  instructor,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will 
command:  1.  Right  turn;  and  when  exactly  opposite 
to  that  point  he  will  add  : 

2!  March. 

348.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  phtoon  will 
turn   to   the  right,  in  conformity  "with  the  principles 


■ 


£23! 


—*.       o 


Br 


Eh 


t=3 


|  i  i  i  ,i  i  i  i  i  i  n- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  OOMPANY-i-LESSON  VI.        163 

prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402.  Its 
guide  will  so  direct  his  march  as  to  bring  the  front 
rank  inn n,  next  on  his  left,  opposite  to  the  instructor; 
the  chief  of  tie'  platoon  will  march  before  "its  (-"litre ; 
and  when  its  guide*  shall  be  near„the  line  of  battle, 
he  will  command  : 


1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

349.  At  the  command  Halt,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  right  ol  the  platoon  shall  arrive  at  the 
distance  of  throe  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  the  pla- 
toon will  halt:  the  tiles  not  yet  in  line, .will  come  up 
promptly.  The  guide  will  throw  himself  on  ihe  line  of 
battle,  opposite  to  one  of  tin'  three  left  files  of  his  pla- 
toon ;  he  will  face  to  the  instructor,  who  will  align  him 
on  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left.  The  chief  of  pla- 
toon having,  at  the  same  time,  gone  to  the„point  where 
the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  will,  as  soon  as  he 
sees  all  the  hies  of  the  platoon  in  line,  command: 

/ 

Right— Dress.' 

350.  At  this,  the  first  platoon  will  align  itse'f ;  the 
front  rank    man,   who  finds  himself  opposite  to  the 

.  guide,  will  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm 
of  this  guide,  and  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  from  the 
right,  will  direct  the  alignment  on  this  man. 

351.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
Straight  forward,  until  its  guide  shall  arrive  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first ;  it  will  then  turn  to  the  right 
at  the  command  of  its  chief,  and  march  towards  the 
line  of  battle,  its  guide  directing  himself  on  the  left 
file  of  the  first  platoon. 


164        SCHOOL  <>F  THE  COMPANY-LESSON  VI. 

352.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will 
be  halted,  as  prescribed  for  the  first;  at  the  instant  it 
halts,4  its  guide  will  spring  on  the  line  of  battle,  oppo- 
site to  one  of  the  three  left  files,  of.  his  platoon,  and 
will  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  instructor. 

353.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its 
files  in  line,  and  its  guide  established  on  the  direction, 
will  command: 

Right^-DRESS. 

354.  Having  given  this  command,  he  "will  return  to 
his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around  the  left ;  the 
second   pi^toon    will    dross    up  on  the  alignment  of 
the  first,  and,  when  established,  the  captain  will  com-  . 
mand  : 

Front. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  com 
mand : 

Guides— POSTS. 

356.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  return 
to  their  places  in  line  *of  battle. 

357.  A  column,  by  platoons,  left  in  front,  will  form 
on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and,  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the  se- 
cond platoon'  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  re- 
ciprocally. The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having 
aligned  it,   from  the  point  of  appui,  (the  left;  will 


6CH00L  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.        165 

retire  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer.  The  captain 
having  halted  the  first  platoon  three  paces  behind  the 
line  of  battle,  will  go  to  the  same  point  to  align  this 
platoon,  and  then  command  :  Fr.ONT.  At  the  com- 
mand guides— posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the 
captain  will  shift  to  his  proper  flank,  and  the  guides 
take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle. 

358.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are  to  be 
exercised,  at  the  same  time,  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, the  colonel  will  ind;cate  the  lessoneor  lessons 
they  are  severally  to  execute.  The  whole  will  com- 
mence by  a  bugle  signal,  and  terminate  in  like  man- 
ner. * 
—                                       « 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into 
single  rank,  and  reciprocally . 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks  in 
the  manner  indicated,  No.  3,  school  of  the  soldier,  and 
supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  or  left  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
single  rank,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  one  rank, form  company.     2.  March. 

360.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  will  face 
to  the  right. 

361.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
step  off*  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front 
rank. 

362.  Thefirst  file  will  step  off"  at  the  same  time  with 
the  guide ;  the  front  rank  man  will  turn  to  the  right  at 
the  first  step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  himself  followed 
by  the  rear  rank  man  of  his  file,  who  will  come  to  turn 


■96         SCHOOL  OF  THE  CONU*  ANT— LESSON  VI. 

on  the  same  spot  where  he  had  turned.  The  secoad 
file,  and  successively  all  the  other  tiles,  will  step  off 
as  has  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  the  front  rank  man 
of  each  file  following  immediately  the  rear  rank  man 
of' the  file  next  oh  his  right.  The  captain  will  super- 
intend the  movement,  and  when  the  last  man  shall 
have  stepped  oil',  he  will  halt  the  company,  and  face, 
it  to  the  front. 

363.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  places  HI  line 
of  battle,  two  paries  in  rear  of  the  rank: 

364.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
command: 


1.  In  two  ranlcs,  form  company.     2.    Company 
right— Face.     3.  March. 

-365.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  right;  the  right  guide  and  the  man  on  the 
right  will  remain  face  to  the  front. 

.  366.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who  have 
faced  to  the  right,  will  step  off  and  form  tiles  in  the 
following  manner :  the  second  man  in  the  rank  will 
place  himself  behind  the  first  to  form  the  first  file  ;  the 
third  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  first  in  the 
front  rank  ;  the  fourth  behind  the  third  in  the  rear 
rank.  All  others  will,  in  like  manner,  place  them- 
selves, alternately,,  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  and 
will  thus  form  files  of  two  men,  on  the  left  of  those 
already  formed. 


[QOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.         107 

4 

•  31)7.  The  formations  above  described  will  be  habitu- 
ally executed  by  the  right  of  companies ;  but  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  have  them  executed  by 
the  left,  he  will  face  the  company  about,  and  post  the 
guides  in  the  rear  rank. 

3§8.  The  formation  will  then  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  ami  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples as  by  the  front  rank:  the  movement  commencing 
with  the'lefr  file;  now  become  the  right,  and  in  eaeh 
file  by  the  rear  rank  man,  now  become  the  front  ;  the 
left  guide  will  conform- to  what  has*'  been  prescribed 
for  the  left. 

:*69.  The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will  face 
the  company  to  its  proper  trout. 

.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute  either 
of  the  formations  above  described,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  break  to  the  /ear  by  the  fight  or  left  of 
companies,  and  wi d'then  give  the  commands  just  pre- 
scribed for  the  instructor!  Each  company  will  exe- 
cute the  movement  as  if  acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks 
into  four,  and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and 
in  marclt. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a 
Jialt,  and  supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column  right  iu 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
four  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.  2.  Company  lift — 
Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick— ■March.) 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will 
remain  faced  to   the  front,  the   company  will  face  to 


168        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LEtiSON  VI. 

the  left;  the  rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  of  one 
pace  from  the  front  rank  by  a  side  step  to  the  left  and 
rear,  and  the  men  will  form  into  four  ranks  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

373.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four 
men  will  reface  to  the  front  without  undoubling.  All 
the  other  files  of  four  will  step  off,  and  closing  succes- 
sively to  about  five  inches  of  the  preceding  file,  will 
halt,  and  immediately  face  to  the  front,  the  men  re- 
maining doubled. 

374.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places  in 
line  of  battle,  at  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

375.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  -into  two  ranks,  he 
will  command : 


1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  Company  right — 
Face.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

377.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will 
stand  fast,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right. 

378.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
step  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  fronfr 
rank.  The  leading  file  of  four  men  will  step  off  at  the 
same  time,  the  other  files  standing  fast;  the  second 
file  will  step  off  when  there  shall  be  between  it  and 
the  first  space  sufficient  to  form  into  two  ranks. 
The  following  files  will  execute  successively  what 
has  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  As  soon  as  the 
last  file  'shall  have  its  distance,  the  instructor  will 
command : 


.  SCHOOL  OF  THE  C- 'MP ANY- LESSON  VI.         169 


1.  Company.    2   Halt.    3.  Front. 

370.  At  the  command  front,  the  company  will  face 
t<>  the  front,  and  the  files  will  undouble. 

380.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and 
marching  to  the  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  forul  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  command : 


1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  the  left,  double 
files.    3.  March  (or  double  quick— March). 

331.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the 
left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march 
straight  to  the  front ;  the  company  will  make  a  half 
face  to  the  left,  the  odd  numbers  placing  themselves 
behind  the  even  numbers.  The  even  numbers  of  the 
rear  rank  will  shorten  their  steps  a  little,  to  permit 
the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  to  get  between  them 
and  the  even  numbers  of  that  rank.  The  files  thus 
formed  of  fours,  except  the  left  file,  will  continue  to 
march  obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps  slightly,  so  as 
to  keep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guide  ;  each  file 
will  close  successively  oh  the  file  next  on  its  left,  and 
when  at  the  proper  distance  from  that  file,  will  face 
to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  right,  and  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

38  2.  The  company  being  in  march  to  the  front  in 
four  ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it 
into  two  rauks,  he  will  command: 

12* 


1^0        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LESSON  VI. 

1.  In  tico  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  the  right,  tut' 
double  files.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

383.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  . 
left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight 
to  the  front;  the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to 
the  right  and  march  obliquely,  lengthening  the  step  a 
little,  in  order  to  keep,  as  near  as  possible,  abreast  of 
the  guide.  As  soon  as  the  second  file  from  the  left 
shall  have  gained  to  the  right  the  interval  necessary 
for  the  left  file  to  form  into  two  ranks,  the  second  file 
will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  left  and 
march  straight  forward  ;  the  left  file  will  immediately 
form  into  two  ranks,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  left.  Each  Tile  will  execute,  successively,  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  file  next  to  the  left, 
and  each  file  will  form  into  two  ranks  when  the  file 
next  on  its  right  has  obliqued  the  required  distance 
and  faced  to  the  front. 

384.  If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part  of  a 
column,  left  in  front,  these  different  movements  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means,  substituting  the  indication  lift  for 
right. 


END  OF   THE  SCHOOL  OF   THE  COMPANY. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

General   'principles   and   division    of  the  in- 
struction. 

1.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  sub- 
jected to  such  rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander  the 
mea.  s  of  moving  them  in  any  direction  with  the  great- 
est promptitude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should 
be  executed  with  the  same  precision  as  in  closed 
ranks,  nor  is  it. desirable,  as  such  exactness  would 
materially  interfere,  with  their  prompt  execution. 

:\.  When  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the 
way  lor,  and  to  protect  the  advance  of,  the  main 
corps,  their  movements  should  be  so  regulated  by  this 
corps,  as  to  keep  it  constantly  covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  reserve, 
the  strength  and  cotnpositu  n  of  which  will  vary  ac- 
cording to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  dis- 
tance of  the  main  corps,  a  very  small  reserve  will  be 
sufficient  for  each  company,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to 
fill  vacant  places,  furnish  the  line  with  cartridges, 
relieve  the  fatigued,  and  serve  as  a  rallying  point  for 
the  skirmishers. 

6.  If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance, 
besides  the  company  reserves,  another  reserve  will  be 
required,  composed  of  entire  companies,  which  will  be 
employed  to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts  of  the 
line  as  may  be  warmly  attacked ;  this  reserve  should 
be  strong  enough  to  relieve  at  least  half  the  compa- 
nies deployed  as  skirmishers. 

(171) 


172  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRBHSHWtS. 

7.  The  reserve  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre 
of  the  line  of  skirmishers,  the  company  reserves  atone 
hundred  and  fifty,  and  the  principal  reserve  at  four 
hundred  paces.  This  rule,  however,  is  not  invariable. 
The  reserves,  while  holding  themselves  within  sus- 
taining distance  (4' the  line,  should  be,  as  much  as  pos- 
sible, in  position  to  atford  each  other  mutual  protec- 
tion, and  must  carefully  profit  by  any  accidents  of  the 
ground  to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the 
eneiny,  and  to  shelter  themselves  from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  executed 
in  quick,  or  double  quick  time.  The  run  will  be  re- 
sorted to  only  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their 
pieces  in  the  mauuer  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated  by 
the  sounds  of  the  bugle. 


11.  The  officers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  will  repeat,  and  cause  the  commands 
to  be  executed,  as  soon  as  they  are  given  ;  but  to  avoid 
mistakes  when  the  signals  are  employed,  they  will 
wait  until  the  last  bugle  note  is  sounded  before  com- 
mencing the  movement. 

12.  When  skirmishers  are  ordered  to  move  rapid- 
ly, the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  seo 
that  the  men  economise  their  strength,  keep  cool,  and 
profit  by  all  the  advantages  which  the  ground  may 
offer  for  cover/    It  is  only  by  this  continual  watch- 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SBIRMISHER3.  173 

fulness  on  the  part  of  all  grades,  that  a  fine  of  skir- 
mishers can  attain  success. 

13.  This  instruction  will  be  divided  into  five  articles, 
and  subdivided  as  follows : 

Article  First. 

1.  To  deploy  forward. 

2.  To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

3.  To  extend  intervals. 

4.  To  close  intervals. 

5.  To  relieve  skirmishers. 


Article   Second. 


1.  To  advance  in  line. 

2.  To  retreat  in  lino. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  march  by  the  flank. 


Article  Third. 

1.  To  fire  at  a  halt. 

2.  To  fire  marching. 

Article  Fourth. 

1.  The  rally. 

2.  To  form  column  to  march  in  any  direction. 

3.  The  assembly: 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

Article  Fiftit. 


1.  To  deploy  a  batalion  as  skirmishers. 

2.  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

14.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that  the 
movements  are  executed  by  a  company  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  on  a  front  equal  to  that  of  the  battalion 
in  order  of  battle.  In  the  fifth  article,  it  is  supposed 
that  each  company  of  the  battalion,  being  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  occupies  a  front  of  one  hundred  paces. 
From  the^e  two  examples,  rules  may  be  deduced  for 
all  cases,  whatever  may  be  the  "numerical  strength  of 
the  skirmishers,  and  the  extent  of  ground  they  ought 
to  occupy. 


Article  First. 


,  Deployments.    ■ 

15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  in 

two  ways— forward,  and  by  the  flank. 

16.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  when 
the  company  is  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be 
established  as  skirmishers :  it  will  be  deployed  by  the 
flank,  when  it  finds  itself  already  on  that  line. 

17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, it  will  be  divided  into  two  platoons,  and  each 
platoon  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections  ;  the  corn- 
rales  in  battle,  forming  groups  of  four  men,  will  be 
t  aretul  to  know  and  to  sustain  each  other.    The  cap 


INSTRUCT!  'N  FOR  SKIRMI3HERH  175 

tain  will  assure  himself  that  the  files  in  the  centre  of 
each  platoon  and  section  are  designated. 


1  -'.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  on 

its  right,  left,,  or'  centre  rile,  or  on   any  other  named 

file  whatsoever.     In  this  manner,  skirmishers  may  be 

thrown  forward  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  on 

.any  ground  they  may  be  required  to  occupy. 


\9.  A  chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to  pre- 
serve their  alignment,  but  no  advantages  which  the 
ground  may  present  should  be  sacrificed  to  attain  this 
regularity. 


.20.  The  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on 
the  extent  of  ground  to  be  covered  ;  but  in  general,  it 
is  not  proper  that  the  groups  of  four  men  should  be 
removed  more  than  fort}  paces  from  each  other.  The 
habitual  distance  between  men  of  the  same  group  in 
open  grounds  will  be  five  paces  ;  in  no  case  will  they 
lose  sight  of  each  other. 


21.  The  front  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  battalion 
comprehends  its  front  and  the  half  of  each  interval 
which  separates  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right  and 
left,.  If  a  line,  whose  wings  are  not  supported,  should 
be  covered  by  skirmishers,  it  will  be  necessary  either 
to  protect  the  Ihmks  with  skirmishers,  or  to  extend 
them  in  front  of  the  line  so  far  beyond  the  wings  as 
effectually  to  oppose  any  attempt  which  might  be 
made  by  the  enemy's  skirmishers  to  disturb  the  flanks. 


176  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMSHERS. 

To  deploy  forieqrd- 

22.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  when 
the  captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  forward  on  the  left 
file  of  the  first  platoon,  holding  the  second  platoon  in 
reserve,  he  will  command  : 

1.  First  platoon — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  left  file — take  intervals. 

•    3.  March  (or  double  quick — MARCH.) 

23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves  rapidly  two  paces  behind 
the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  sections  of  the  first  pla- 
toon ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one  pace  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and  will  place. himself 
between  the  two  sections  in  the  front  rank  ;is  soon  as 
the  movement  begins ;  the  fourth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  on  the  leftof  the  front  rank  of  the  sameplatoon, 
as  soon  as  he  can  pass.  The  eaptain  will  indicate  to 
this  sergeant  the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  di- 
rect his  march.  The  first  lieutenant,  placing  himself 
before  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon,  will  command: 

Second  platoon,  backward — March. 

24.  At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  step 
three  paces  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  unmask  the  flank' of 
the  first  platoon.  It  will  then  be  baited  by  its  chief, 
and  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left, 
find  the  third  sergeant  on  the  right  flank  of  this  pla- 
toon. 


J..U-.     ' 


a       ■■         tab         ar  11       «t 

"         *.*        urn  «*      ;» 


d      ; ;        ! 


..£<.: 


>■  a 


^2& 


..- 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  177 

25.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of  four 
men,  conducted  by  the  fourth  sergeant,  will  direct  it- 
self on  the  point  indicated  ;  all  the  other  groups  of 
fours  throwing  forward  briskly  the  left  shoulder,  will 
move  diagonal};  t»  the  front  in  double  quick  time,  so 
as  to  gain  to  the  right  the  space  of  twenty  paces,  which 
shall  be  the  distance  between  curb  group  and  that  im- 
mediately on  its  left.  When  -the  second  group  from 
the  left  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with,  and  twenty  paces 
from  the  first,  it  will  march  straight  to  the  front,  con- 
forming to  the  gait  and  direction  of  the  first,  keeping 
constantly  on  the  same  alignment  and  at  twenty  paces 
from  it.  The  third  group  and  all  the  others,  will  eon- 
form  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second: 
they  will  arrive  successively  on  the  line.  The  right 
guide  will  arrive  with  the  last  group. 

26.  The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point  where 
the  left  of  the  line  should  rest,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand the  skirmishers  to  halt;  the  men  composing 
each  group  of  fours  will  thfn  immediately  deploy  at 
five  paces  from  each  other,  and  to  the  right  and  left 
of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  file  in  each  group, 
the  rear  rank  men  placing  themselves  on  the  left  of 
their  file  leaders.  If  any  groups  he  not  in  line  at  the 
command  halt,  they  will  move  up  rapidly,  conforming 
to  what  has  just  been  prescribed. 

27.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be 
fired  upon  by  the  enemy,  the  captain  may  cause  the 
groups  of  fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gam  their  proper 
distances. 

23.  The  line  being  formed,  the  non-commissioned 
officers  on  the  right,  left  and  centre  of  the  platoon  will 


178  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  ofthe  line  and  op- 
posite the  positions  they  respectively  occupied.  The 
chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregular- 
ities, and  then  place  themselves  twenty-five  or  thirty 

paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  each  hav- 
ing with  him  four  men  taken  from  the  reserve,  and 
also  a  bugler  who  will  repeat,  if  necessary,  the  signals 
sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skirmishers  should  be  particularly  instructed 
to  take  advantage  of  any  cover  which  the  ground  may 
offer,  and  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground  whenever  such 
a  movement  is  necessary  to  protect  them  from  the 
fire  of  the  enemy.  Regulaiity  in  the  alignment 
should  yield  to  this  important  advantage. 

30.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieuten 
ant  will  face  the  second  platoon  about ,  and  march  it 
promptly,  and  by  the  shortest  line,  to  about  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line. 
He  will  hold  it  always  Jtt  this  distance,  unless  order- 
ed to  the  contrary. 

31.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  line.      This  rule  is  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habitu- 
ally-iu  the  scabbard,  and  this  rule  applies  equilly  to 
the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve  ;  whenever  bayonets 
are  required  to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  be 
given.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superiute  d- 
ence  to  the  whole  deployment,  and  then  promptly 
place  himself  about  eighty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre 
ofthe  line  lie  will  have  with  him  a  bugler  and  tour 
men  taken  from  the  reserve. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.    **        I7fl 

33.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  'right  or 
the  centre  of  the  platoon,  by  the  same  commands, 
substituting  the  indication  right  or  centre,  for  that  of 
left  file. 

34.  The  deployment  on  the  right  or  the  centre  will 
be  made  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  above; 
in  this  latter  case,  the  centre  of  the  platoon  will  be 

marked  by  tlie  right  group  of  fours  in  the  second 
section;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the 
right  of  this  group,  and  serve  as  the  guide  of  the  pla- 
toon during  the  deployment. 


3f>.  In  whatever  manner  the  deployment  be  made, 
on  the  right,  left  or  centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of 
fours  will  always  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  other, 
and  upon  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered 
file.  The  deployments  will  habitually  be  made  at 
twenty  pav  interval;  but  if  a  greater  interval  be 
required,  it  will  be  indicated  iu  the  command. 


.36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers,  so 
near  the  main  body  as  to  render  a  reserve  unneces- 
sary, the  entire  company  will  be  extended  in  the  same 
manner,  and  according  to  the  sa  .  e  principles,  as  for 
the  deployment  of  a  platoon.  In  this  case,  the  third 
lieutenant  will  command  the  fourth  section,  and  a 
non-commissioned  officer  designated  for  that  purpose, 
the  second  section;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  act  as 
centre  guide;  the  file  closers  will  place"  themselves 
ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  tbeirplaces 
in  line  of  battle.  The  first  and  second  lieutenant  will 
each  have  a  bugler  near  him. 


180  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

To  deploy  hy  the  flank. 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  by  the  flank,  holding  the  first 
platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  By  the  right 
flank — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  double  quick 
—March.) 

38.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves,  respectively,  two  paces 
behind  the  centres  of  the  first  and  second  sections  of 
the  second  platoon  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  wi]l  place  him-v 
self  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  pla- 
toon ;  the  third  sergeant,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will 
place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the 
same  platoon.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  him  the 
point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direantris  march. 
The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
Nos.  23  and  24.  The  fourth  sergeant  will  place  him- 
self on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  sergeant 
will  remain  on  the  right  flank. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third 
lieutenants  will  place  themselves  two  paces  "behind 
the  left  group  of  their  respective  sections. 

40.  At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  commence  the  movement ;  the 
left  group  of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but  will  deploy  as 
soon  as  there  is  room  on  its  right,  conforming  to  what 


I6U. 


UHGnaiiKiaii  Diauiiaia 


wamm  e  ■Q  ■  mam  nans  to      ■■  \\\  ,  >--  g  --^> > 

■  OS 


ibb        am 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  181 


has  been  prescTTmkl  No.  26  ;  the  third  sergeant  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  group,  to  con- 
duct it ;  the  second  group  will  halt  at  twenty  paces 
from  the  one  on  its  left,  the  third  group  at  twenty 
paces  from  the  second,  and  so  on  to  the  right.  As  the 
groups  halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy,  and  deploy 
as  has  been  explained  for  the  left  group. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  wiil'pay  particular  atten- 
tion to  the  successive  deployments  of  the  groups, 
keeping  near  the  group  about  to  halt,  as  to  rectify 
any  errors  which  may  be  committed.  When  the  de- 
ployment is  completed,  they  will  place  themselves 
thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  as 
has  been  heretofore  prescribed.  The  non-commis- 
sioned officers  will  also  place  themselves  as  previous- 
ly indicated. 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  causing  it  to  face  about,  will 
move  it  as  indicated,  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank 
according  to  the  same  principles,  substituting  left 
flank  for  right  flank. 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deploy  the  com- 
pany upon  the  centre  of  one  of  the  platoons,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers. '  2.  By  the  right 
dnd  left  flanks — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  dou- 
ble quick — March.) 

45.  At  the  first  command,  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  will  conform  to  what  has  been  ' 
prescribed  No.  38. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKlttMfcjIJKUS 


.    Mi-"  I 


46.  At  the  second  command^Krthst  lieutenant 
will  place  himself  behind  the  left  group  of  the  right 
section  of  the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieutenant  be- 
hind the  right  group  of  the  .left-  section  of  the  same 
platoon. 

47.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  seetion  will 
face  to  the  right,  the  left  section  will  face  to  the  left, 
the  group  on  the  right  of  this  latter  section  will  stand 
last.  The  two  sections  will  ui<  ve  off  in  opposite 
directions;  the  third  sergeant  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  right  file  to  conduct  it,  the  second  ser- 
geant on  the  right  of  the  left  file.  The  two  groups 
nearest  that  which  srands  fast,'  will  each  halt  at 
twenty  paces  from  this  group,  and  each  of  the  other 
groups  will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  group 
which  is  in  rear  of  it.  Each  group  will  deploy  as 
heretofore  prescribed  No.  40. 

48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct  the 
movement,  holding  themselves  always  abreast  of  the 
group  which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be 
•made  on  any  named  group  whatsoever;    in  this  case, 

the -fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  before  the  group 
indicated,  and  the  deployment  will  be  made  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  heretofore  prescribed. 

50.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles. 


m  To  extend  intervals. 

51.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend 
a  line  of  skirmishers,  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  deployments. 


i<jy. 


I 


a  a 


a         *?. 


m  a 

■  e 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  183 

52.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is 
at  a  halt,  and  that  the  captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to 
the  left,  he  will  command  : 


1.    l)y  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces)  extend  intervals # 
2.  March  (or  double  quirk — March.) 

53.  At  the  command  march,  the  group  on  the  right 
will ?sta i id  fast,  all  the-  other  groups  will  face  to  the 
left,  and  each  group  will  extend  its  interval  to  the 
prescribed  distance  by  the  means  indicated  No.  40. 

.".  t.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to  pre- 
serve between  each  other  the  distance  of  rive  paces, 
unless  the  nature  of  the  ground. should  render  it  ne- 
cessary that  they  should  close  nearer,  in  order  to  keep 
in  si>rht  of  each  other.  The  intervals  refer  to  tie'  b 
between  the  groups,  and  not  to  the  distance  between 
the  men  in  each  group.  The  intervals  will  be  taken 
from  the  right  or  left  man  of  the  neighboring  group. 

55,  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the 
front,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the 
right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces)  extend  intervals 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March. ) 

56.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  march  on  the  point  of  direction  :  the  other 
groups  throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and  tak- 
ing the  double  quick  step,  will  open  their  intervals 
to  the  prescribed  distance,  by  the  means  indicated 
No.  25,  conforming  also  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  54. 


161  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre  of  the 
line  according  to  the  same  principles. 

58.  If,  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that 
one  company  or  platoon  should  occupy  a  line  which 
had  been  previously  occupied  by  two,  the  men  of  the 
company  or  platoon  which  is  to  retire,  will  fall  suc- 
cessively to  the  rear  as  they  are  relieved  by  the  ex- 
tension of  the  intervals. 


To  close  intervals. 

59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescrib- 
ed for  the  deployments. 

60.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and  the 
captain  should  wish  to  close  intervals  to  the  left,  he 
will  command : 

1.  By  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces)  close  intervals. 
2.  March  or  (double  quick— Ma&CH.) 

61.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  will  stand 
fast,  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left  and  close  to 
the  prescribed  distance,  each  group  facing  to  the 
enemy  as  it  attains  its  proper  distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  : 

1.   On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces)  close  intervals. 
2.  March  or  (double  quick— March.) 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  185 

63.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  move  on  in  the  direction  previously  indi- 
cated;  the  other  greups  advancing  the 'right  shoul- 
der, will  close  to  the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  re- 
duced to  the  prescribed  distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on  the 
centre,  according  to  the  same  principles.     . 

65.  When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order  to 
reinforce  a  line  of  skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause  two 
companies  to  cover  the  ground  which  had  been  pre- 
viously occupied  by  one,  the  new  company  will  deploy 
so  as  to  finish  its  movement  at  twenty  paces  in  rear  of 
the  line  it  is  to  occupy,  and  the  men  will  successively 
move  upon  that  line,  as  they  shall  be  unmasked  by  the 
men  of  the  old  company.  The  reserves  of  the  two  com- 
panies will  unite  behind  the  centre  of  the  line. 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  be  re- 
lieved, the  captain  will  be  advised  of  the  intention, 
which  he  will  immediately  communicate  to  his  first 
and  second  lieutenants. 

67.  The  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment 
forward,  so  as  to  finish  the  movement  at  about  twenty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

68.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new 
company,  by  command  of  their  captain,  will  advance 
rapidly  a  few  paces  beyond  the  old  line  and  halt;  the 
new  line  being  established,  the  old  company  will  as- 
semble on  its  reserve,  taking  care  not  to  get  into 
groups  of  fours  until  they  are  beyond  the  fire  of  the 
enemy. 

13* 


1SG  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS*      ' 

69.  If- the  skirmishers  to  he  relieved  ;uv  taafrching* 
in  retreat,  jbhe,  company  thrown  out  to  relieve  them 
will  deploy  by  the  flank,  as  prescribed  No.  363  and  fol- 
lowing.    The  old   skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire 

with  order,  and  having  passed  the  new  line,  they  will 
form  upon  the  reserve. 

Article  Second. 
To  advance. 

To  advance  in  lint,  and  to  retreat  in  line. 

70  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers is  marching  by  the  fro  it,  the  guide  will  be 
habitually  in  the  centre.  No  particular  indication  to 
this  effect  need  he  given  in  the  commands,  but  if  <m 
the  contrary  it  be  intended  that  the  directing  guide 
should  he  on  the  right,  or  left,  the  command  guide 
ri<r!tt,  or  guide  left,  will  he  given  immediately  after 
that  pf  forward. 

71.  The  captain  wishing  tin?  line  of  skirmishers  to 
advance,  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

72.  This  command  will  he  repeated  with  the  great- 
est rapidity  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  in  case  of 
need  by  the  sergeants..  This  rule  is  general,  whether 
the  skirmishers  inarch  by  the  front  or  by  the  flank 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIftMfSHERS.  187 

73.  At  the  first  confrnand,  three  sergeants  will  move 
briskly  <rii  the  lino,  the  first  on  the  right,  the  second 
on  the  left,  and  the  third  in  the  centre. 

71.  Atrthe"  cbramand  march  the  line  will  move  to 
the  front,  the  guide  charged  with  the  direction  will 
on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  the  skirmishers. 
wijl  hold  themselves  aligned  on  this  guide,  and  pre- 
serve their  intervals  towards  him. 

7-">.  The  chief's  of  sections  will  march  immediately 
behind  their  sections,  so  as  to  direct  their  move- 
ments. 

7^. 'The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence 

to  the  movement. 

77.  W.i.en  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  he 
will  command  : 

II  ALT. 

78.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line 
Will  halt.  The  chief's  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify 
any  irregularity  in  the  alignment  and  intervals,  and  af- 
ter taking  every  possible  advantage  which  the  ground 
may  offer  for  protecting  the  men,  they,  with  the  three 
sergeants  in  the  line,  will  retire  to  their  proper  places 
in  rear. 

7*d.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skirmishers 
in  retreat,  will  command : 

J.  In  retreat.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

80.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will 
move  on  the  line  as  prescribed,  No.  73. 


183  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

"81.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will 
face  about  individually,  and  march  to  the  rear,  con- 
forming to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exer- 
tion to  preserve  order. 

83.  To  halt  the  skirmishers,  marching  in  retreat, 
the  captain  will  command  : 

Halt. 

84.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt,  and 
immediately  face  to  the  front. 

85.  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  gsides  will 
each  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  78. 

To  change  direction. 

86.  If  the  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  «hange  direction  to  the  right,  he 
will  command :  ^ 

1.  Right  wheel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 

March.) 

87.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
mark  time  in  his  place;  the  left  guide  will  move  in  a 
circle  to  the  right,  and  that  he  may  properly  regulate 
his  movements,  will  occasionally  cast  his  eyes  to  the 
right,  so  as  to  observe  the  direction  of  the  line,  and 
the  nature  of  the  ground  to  be  passed  over.  The 
centre  guide  will  also  march  in  a  circle  to  the  right, 
and  in  order  to  conform  his  movements  to  the  general 
direction,  will  take  care  that  his  steps  are  only  half 
the  length  of  the  steps  of  the  guide  on  the  left. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  189 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of 
their  steps  by  their  distance  from  the  marching  flank, 
being  less  as  they  approach  the  pivot,  and  greater  as 
they  are  removed  from  it;  they  will  often  look  to 
the  marching  flank,  so  to  preserve  the  direction  and 
their  intervals. 

89.  When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to 
resume  the  direct  march,  he  will  command: 

1.  Foncard.    2.  March. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  cease  to 
wheel,  and  the  skirmishers  will  move  direct  to  the 
front;  the  centre  guide  will  march  on  the  point 
which  will  be  indicated  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in 
place  of  moving  it.  to  the  front,  he  will  command : 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command  the  line  will  halt. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  made 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  means,  and  by  the  same 
commands,  as  a  line  marching  in  advanc* ;  for  ex- 
ample, if  the  captain  should  wish  to  refuse  his  left, 
now  become  the  right,  he  will  command:  1.  Left 
wheel ;  2.  March.  At  the  command  halt,  the  skirm- 
ishers will  face  to  the  enemy. 

95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  the  line,  the  captain 
should  wish  to  continue  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he 
will,  when  he  judges  the  line  has  wheeled  sufficiently, 
command: 


•190  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIH.UIrMIi 

1.    In  retreat. 
2.  March. 
To  march  by  the  flank. 

96.  The  captain  wishing  the  skirmishers  to  march 
by  the  right  flank,  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  flank. 

•    2.  March  (of  double  Quick— March,) 

97.  At  the  first  comma  nd,  the  three  sergeants  will 

plaee  themselves  OB  the  line. 

98.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  -will 
face  to  the  right  and  move  off;  the  right  guide  -will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  Leading  man  on  the 
right  to  conduct  him,  and  will  march  on  the  point  in- 
dicated; each  skirmisher,  will  take  care  to  follow  ex- 
actly in  the  direction  of  the  one  immediately  preced- 
ing him,  atod  to  preset  ye  his. distance. 

1)!'.  The  skirmishers  may  he  marched,  by  the  left 
flank,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the 
same  commands,  substituting  lift  tor  right ■;  the  left 
guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  oi  the  leading 
man  to  conduct  him. 

100.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  theHank, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  them,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

Halt. 


[NSTROCTfON  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  19; 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt 
and  face  to  the  enemy.  The  officers  and  sergeants 
will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  78. 

102..  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements 
of  the  line,  ami  be  held  always  about  one  hundred  and 
fifty  paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  position  to  second  its 
operations. 

103.  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to 
march  it  in  advance,  he  will  command :  1.  Platoon 
forward.  •->.  Gu&e  left.  3.  March...  If  he  should 
wish  tomarch  it  in  retreat,  he.  wid  command:  1.  In 
retreat.  2.  MaRCH.  :'>.  Guide  right.  At  the  com- 
mand halt,  it  will  reface  to  the  enemy. 

101  The  men  should  be  made  to  understand  that 
the  signals  or  commands,  such  as  forward,  mean  that 
the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the  enemy ;  in  ntrrai, 
th;it  they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  lift  flank, 
that  the  men  jnusf  face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever 
may  lie  their  position. 

105.  If  the  skirmisher's  he  marching  hy  the  flank, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the 
right  (or  left,)  he  will  command  :  1.  By  file  right  (or 
left.)  2.  MARCH.  These  movements  will  also  be  ex- 
ecuted by  the  signals  Nes.  14  and  15. 


Article  Third. 

The   Ji  rings. 
106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or  march- 


192  INSrRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

To  fire  at  a  halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  captain 
will  command : 

Commence — FIRING. 


108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  men 
of  the  front  rank  will  commence  firing  ;they  will  re- 
load rapidly,  and  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  fire 
again.  During  this  time  the  men  of  the  rear  rank 
will  come  to  a  ready,  ami  as  soon  as  their  respective 
file  leaders  have  loaded,  they  will  also  fire  and  reload. 
The  men  of  each  file  will  thus  continue  the  firing, 
conforming  to  this  principle,  that  the  one  or  the  other 
shall  always  have  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  ns*to 
aim  with  accuracy  ;  they  should,  moreover,  endeavor 
to  estimate  correctly  the  distance  between  themselves 
and  the  enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  de- 
liver their  fire  with  the  greater  certainty  of  success. 

110.  Skirmishers  will  notrsmain  in  the  same  place 
whilst  re-loading,  unless  protected  by  accidents  in 
the  ground. 

To  fire  marching. 

111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands as  the  fire  at  a  halt. 

112.  At"  the  command  commence  firing,  if  the  line 
be  advancing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt, 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  193 

fire,  and  reload  before  throwing  himself  forward.  The 
rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march, 
and  after  passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front 
rank  man,  will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select  his  object, 
and  fire  when  hjs  front  rank  man  has  loaded  ;  the  fire 
will  thus  continue  to  be  executed  by  each  file ;  the 
skirmishers  will  keep  united,  and  endeavor  as  much 
as  possible,  to  preserve  the  general  direction  of  the 
alignment. 

HS.^If  the  line  of  march  be  in  retreat,  at  the  com- 
mand commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file 
will  halt,  face  to  the  enemy,  fire,  and  then  reload 
whilst  moving  to  the  rear  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the 
same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  halt  ten  or  twelve 
paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man,  face  about,  come  to  a 
.ready,  and  fire  when  his  front  rank  man  has  passed 
him  in  retreat  and  loaded ;  after  which,  he  will  move 
to  the  rear  and  reload ;  the  front  rank  man  in  his 
turn,  after  marching -briskly  to  the  rear,  will  halt  at 
ten  or  twelve  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  face  to  the 
enemy,  load  his  piece  and  fire,  conforming  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed;  the  firing  will  thus  be  con- 
tinued. 


114.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
at  the  command  commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man 
of  every  file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  step  one  pace  for- 
ward, halt,  and  fire  ;  the  rear  rank  man  will  continue 
to  move  forward  As  soon  as  the  front  rank.man  has 
fired,  he  will  place  himself  briskly  behind  his  rear  rank 
man  and  reload  whilst  marching.  When  he  has  loaded, 
the  rear  rank  man  will,  in  his  turn,  step  one  pace  for- 
ward, halt,  and  fire,  and  returning  to  the  ranks,  will 
place  himself  behind  his  front  rank  man  ;  the  latter,  in 


194  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHEI 

his  turn,  will  act  in  the  same  manner,  observing  the 
principles.     At  the  command  cease  firing.  the 
men  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake  their  original  posi- 
tions, if. not  already  there. 

1  !.">.  If  the  company  bo  marching  by  the  left  fl.ink, 
the  lire  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples, but  in  this  case,  it  will  be  the  rear  rank  mm 
who  will  fire  first. 

116.  The   following  rules  will  be    observed  in    tin' 
I ';>  Which  they  apply  : 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  march- 
ing bj'the  flank,  at  the  command  Forward — Maim  i:, 
it  will  be  the  mm  whose  pieces  are  loaded,  without 
regard  to  the  particular  rank  to  which  they  belong, 
who  will  move  to  the  front.  Those  men  whoso  pieces 
have  been  discharged,  will  remain  in  their  places  to 
load  them  before  moving  forward,  and  the  firing  will 
ho  continued  agreeable  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
No.  112. 

118.  If  the  line  befiring  either  at  a  halt,  advancing, 
or  whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  In 
retreat— March,  the  men  whose  pieces  arc  loaded, 
will  remain  faced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  fire  in  this 
position;  the  men  whose  pieces  arc  discharged,  will 
retreat  loading  them,  and  the  lire  will  be  continued 
agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  1  I3i 

1  1:).   Tf  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at  a 
halt,  advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at  the  command,  IUj 
the  right  (or/rft )  t!a)ik—M\\icu,  the  men  wbose.pieoea 
are   loaded,   will   step  one   pace  out  of  the  gei 
alignment,  face  to  the  enemy;  aiid  lire  in  this  position; 


NSTRUCT1    N  FOR  SKIRMISHER^.  105 

the  men  whose  pieces  are  unloaded  will  face  iff  the 
right  (or  left)  and  march  in  the 'direction  indicated. 
The  men  whu  stepped  out  of  the  ranks  will  place 
themselves,  fmrnediately  aftei*  firing  upon  the  general 
direction;  and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear  ranis  men, 
as  the  case  m  i\  be,  The  fin*  will  be  continued  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  114. 

l-j.'i  Skirmishers  will  bb  habituated  to  load  their 
pii  a-*  whilst  marching;  Imt  tbey  will  he  enjoine'd  to 
halt  always  an  instant,  when  iii  the  act  of  charging 
cartridge  and  priming. 

|->l  'They  should  be  practiced  to  fire  and  load  kneel- 
ing, lyirtg  down,  and  sit  tiu<r. .  and  much  liberty  should 
be  alloWe'd  in  these  exercises,  in  order  that  they  may 
be  executed  in  the  manner  found  to  he  most  conven- 
ient Skirmishers  should  be  eautioned  not  to  forget 
Unit,  i-i  whatever  position  they  may  load,  it  is  impor- 
tant that  the  piece  should  he  placed  upright  before 
ramminii,.  in  order  that  the  entire  charge  of  powder 
■eh  the  bottom  of  the  bore 

122,  [u  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same 

rank  should  not  all  tire  at  once,  and  the  men  of  the 
same  file   should  he  particular  that  one  or  the  other 

el'  them  he  always  loaded. 

1  .:>.  In  retreating  the  officer  commanding  the  skir- 
mishers should  seize  on  every  Advantage  which  th« 
ground  may1  present,  for  arresting  the  enemy  as  long 
ns  possible. 

1.24.  At  the   signal  to  cease  firing,  the   captain  will 

that  the  order  is  promptly  obeyed;  hut  tin1  men 

who   may   not  be  loaded,  will  load.     If  the.  line  be 

jhing,  it  will  continue  the  movement;  Imt  the  man 

of  each  file  who  happens  to  he  in  front,  will  wait  until 

the  man  in  the  rear  shall  be  abreast  with  him. 


196  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing,  advancing,  at 
the  command  halt,  the  line  will  re-form  upon  the  skir- 
mishers who  are  in  front;  when  the  line  is  retreating, 
upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  rear. 

126.  Officers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  possi- 
ble vigilance  over  aline  of  skirmishers  ;  in  battle,  they 
should  neither  carry  a  rifle  or  fowling  pieee.  In  all 
the  firings,  they,  as  well  as  the  sergeants,  should  see 
that  order  and  silence  are  preserved,  and  that  the 
skirmishers  do  not  wander  imprudently ;  they  should 
especially  caution  them  to  be  calm  and  collected  ;  not 
to  fire  until  they  distinctly  perceive  the  objects  at 
which  they  aim,  and  are  sure  that  those  objects  are 
within  proper  range.  Skirmishers  should  take  ad- 
vantage, promptly  and  with  intelligence,  of  all  shelter 
and  of  all  accidents  of  the  ground,  to  conceal  them- 
selves from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  protect 
themselves  from  his  fire.  It  may  often  happen,  that 
intervals  are  momentarily  lost  when  several  men  near 
each  other  find  a  common  shelter;  but  w  hen  they  quit 
this  position,  they  should  immediately  resume  their 
intervals  and  their  places  in  line,  so  that  they  may 
not,  by  crowding,  needlessly  expose  themselves  to  the 
fire  of  the  enemy. 


{"■ 


^ ;i  %y  ■  v  *  w  ■+■ w  W  *  "XK  :  :--c; 


I  ■ 


#    ■    «    ■     M||l|III[|II«Illt3ll)I;tljl|ll 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  197 

Article  Fourth. 

the  rally'. 
To  form  column. 

127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied 
in  order  to  oppose  the  enemy  with  better  success;  the 
rallies  are  made  at  a  run,  and  with  bayonets  fixed  ; 
when  ordered  to  rally,  the  skirmishers  fix  bayonets 
w  ithout  command. 

128.  There  are  several  ways  of  rallying,  which  the 
chiefs  of  the  line  will  adopt  according  to  circum- 
stances. 

129.  If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely 
disturbed  by  scattered  horsemen,  it  will  not  be  neces- 
sary to  fall  back  on  the  reserve,  but  the  captain  will 
cause  bayonet  to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  should, 
however,  advance  to  charge  the  skirmishersJthe  cap- 
tain will  command,  rally  by  fours."  The  line  will  halt 
if  marching,  and  the  four  men  of  each  group  will  ex- 
ecute this  rally  in  the  following-  manner ;  the  front 
rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file  will  take  the  po- 
sition of  guard  against  cavalry  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of 
the  odd  numbered  file  will  also  take  the  position  of 
guard  against  cavalry,  turning  his  back  to  him,  his 
right  foot  thirteen  inches  from  the  right  foot  of  the 
former,  and  parallel  to  it;  the  front  rank  man  of  the 
odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man  ©f  the  even  file,  will 
also  place  themselves  back  to  back,  taking  a  like  po- 
sition, and  between  the  two  men  already  established, 
facing  to  the  right  and  left;  the  right  feet  of  the  four 


INSTRUI 

men  will  be    brought  together,  fo,r«tijig  »  squ 
serving  for  mutual  support      The  i.mr   men  i 
group  will  come  to  a  ready,  tire  as 
and  load  without  moving  cbeir  let. 


13    .    The    <  -  » j .  t ;  t  in  and    chiels  of  seel  ions    will    each 
cause  the  lour  men  who  constitute  this  gu  ird  tu 
squ  ire.  the  m. mi  separating  *;i  is  to  enu  .•!«■  hi  n  .m:l  tie- 
bugler  to  place,  thein^flves  in  til;'  centre.     Tin 
sergeants  wil.  ewch  promptly    place   biuiseif  i 
group  ii<'ar.  :st  him  in  the  line  of  skirmishers, 

131.    Whenever     the    captain    shall    judge 
sijii,;  ik,  but  slmuld  w  ish  to  li<  1  i  bis  po 

by  strengthening  nis  line;  In-  will  .-,.  [  m  ,nd  : 


Rally  by  sections. 


vol 
move,  rap-;  oily  on  t  lie  rem  it   group  ot 
sections,     r  on  any  ufcher  interior  group  wbu 

lliiliilt   oll'er  ;t    shelter,  or  nth  HI'   p. (die  I  111  I    advui 

the  skirmishers  will  >1  lly  ii    i  ru  i  on  tins 

group,. and  with  >ut  distinction  ofuunibers      Th«  men 

Composing  the  group  Oil  which  the  formation  is  made, 

will  immediately  form  square,  as  herelofore  explained, 

and  elevate   their    pieces.  I  he  bayonets  uppermost,  in 

r  to  indicate  the  point  on  which  the  rally  is  feo  be 

made.  The  other  skirmishers,  as  the}  arrive,  will  oc- 
cupy and  fill  the  open  angular  space  between  these 
four  men,  and  successively  rally  around  the  lirst  nu- 
cleus, and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  compact 


INSTRUCTION  FOJfc  SKIRMISH]  1§9 

The  skirmishers  will  take  as  they  arrive,  the 
positionof  charge  bayonets,  the  point  of  the  bayonet 
more  elevated,  and  will  cook  their  pieces  in  this  po- 
sition. The  movement  concluded,  the  two  exterior 
sasion  may  offer  ami  lead  with- 
out moving  their  fe,et. 

133,  The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his  guard, 
wherever  he  may  judge  his  presence  most  nccee 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular 
to  observe  that  the  rally  is  made  in  silence,  and  with 
promptitude  and  order;  that  seme  pieces  in  each'of 
their  subdivisions  be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the 
fire  is  directed  on  those  points  only  where  it  will  be 
most  effective. 

I3§.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will 
form  into  a  circle  around  its  chief. 

136.  If  the  captain,  or  commander  of  a  line  of  skir- 
mishers formed  of  many  platoons,  should  judire  that 
the  rally   by  sections  does  oot  oiler  sufficient  re 

.  he  will  cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  execu- 
od  for  this  purpose,  he  will  command: 

'l-iv. 

Rally  by  platoons. 


137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  means,  as  the 
rally  by  sections.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  will  conform 
to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  section. 

13S.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers 
on  the  reserve,  will  command : 


200  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

Rally  on  the  reserve. 

139.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  brisk- 
ly on  the  reserve  ;  the  officer  who  commands  it  will 
take  immediate  steps  to  form  square ;  for  this  pur- 
pose, he  will  cause  the  half  sections  on  the  flanks  to 
be  thrown  perpendicularly  to -the  rear;  he  will  order 
the  men  to  come  to  a  ready. 

140.  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the 
run,  will  form  rapidly  into  groups,  and  upon  that  man 
of  each  group  who  is  nearest  the  centre  of  the  section. 
These  groups  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  to- 
wards each  other,  and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  into 
sections  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  while  mov- 
ing to  the  rear ;  the  officers  and  sergeants  will  see  that 
this  formation  is  made  in  proper  order,  and  the  chiefs 
will  direct  their  sections  upon  the  reserve,  taking  care 
to  unmask  it  to  the  right  and  left.  As  the  skirmishers 
arrive,  they  will  continue  and  complete  the  formation 
of  the  square  begun  by  the  reserve,  closing  in  rapidly 
upon  the  latter,  without  regard  to  their  places  in  line ; 
they  will  come  to  a  ready  without  command,  and  fire 
upon  the  enemy  ;  which  will  also  be  done  by  the'  re- 
serve as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked  by  the  skirmishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cav- 
alry while  retreating,  its  chief  will  command  halt,  at 
this  command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly  into  a  conij 
pact  circle  around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his 
section  and  resume  the  march,  the  moment  he  call  do 
so  with  safety.     . 

142.  The  formation  of   the  square    in  a   prompt 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  201 

and  efficient  manner,  requires  coolness  and  activity  on 
the  part  of  both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143s»  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment  - 
of  respite  which  the  enemy's  cavalry  may  leave  him  ; 
as  soon  as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place  himself 
beyond  the  reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a 
position  where  he  may  defend  himself  with  advantage, 
or  by  returning  to  the  corps  to  which  he  belongs. 
For  this  purpose,  being  in  square,  he  will  cause  the 
company  to  break  into  column  by  platoons  at  half  dis- 
tance ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command : 


].  Form  column.    2.  March. 

144.  A.i  the  command  march,  each  platoon  will 
dress  on  its  centre,  and  the  platoon  which  was. facing 
to  the  reajkwill  face  about  without  command.  The 
guides'  win  place  themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of 
their  respective  platoons,  those  of  the  second  platooa 
will  platfe  themselves  at  tyjtf:  distance  from  those  of 
the  first,  counting  from  ttie  rear  rank.  These  dispo- 
sitions being  made,  the  captain  can  move  the  column 
in  whatever  direction  he  may  judge  proper. 

145.  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat-,  he  vr'M 
command : 

1.  In  retreat.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

146.  At  the  comraancWmarc^,  the  column  will  imme. 
diately  face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  move  off  in  the  oppo. 

14* 


202  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

site  direction.     As  soon  as  the  column  is  in* motion, 
the  captain  will  command : 


3.    Guide  right  (or  Irft.) 

147.  He  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading 
guide ;  "the  guides  will  march  at  their  proper  distances, 
and  the  men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  captain 
will  command: 

1.  Form  square.     2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt ; 
the  first  platoon  will  face  about  briskly,  and  the  out- 
er half  sections  of  each  platoon  will  be  thrown  per- 
pendicularly to  the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and 
third  fronts  of  the  square.  The  officers  and  sergeants 
will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities  w#eh  may  be 
committed. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  fafcrnarch  the  column  in  ad- 
rance,  the  captain  wilt  cowmand  : 

1 .  Form  column.      2.  March. 

"    151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  144. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will 
eommand : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — March.,) 
5.  Guide  left  (or  right.) 

153.  At  the  second  eommand,  the  column  will  move 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  203 

forward,  and  at  the  third  command,  the  men  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

154.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain 
ground  to  the  right  or  left,  he  will  do  so  by  rapid 
wheels  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide*  and  for  this 
purpose  will  change  the  guide  whenever  it  may  be 
necessary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at  half 
distance,  right  in  front,  the  captain  can  deploy  the 
first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already  ex- 
plained ;  but  if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the  se-_ 
cond  platoon  forward  on  the  centre  file,  leaving  the 
first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command : 


1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  On  the  centra 
file — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
MarchJ 

156.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  will  caution  his  platoon  to  stand  fast ;  the 
chiefs  of  sections  of  the  .second,  platoon  will  place 
themselves  before  the  centre  of  their  sections ;  the 
fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  pace  in  front  of 
the  centre  ot  the  second  platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right 
section,  second  platoon,  will  command  :  Section  right 
face ;  the  chief  of  the  left  section  :  Section  left  face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will 
move  off  briskly  in  opposite  directions,  and  having  un- 
masked the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will 
respectively  command :     By  the  left  flankr— March; 


204  INSTRUCTION  FOR'  SKIRMISHERS. 

and  By  the  right  flank— March  ;  and  as  soon  as 
these  sections  arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first  pla- 
toon, they  will  command  ;  As  skirmishers — March. 
The  groups  will  then  deploy  according  to  prescribed 
principles,  on  the  right  group  of.  the  left  section, 
which  will  be  directed  by  the  fifth  sergeant  on  the 
point  indicated. 

159.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deployment 
made  by  the  flank,  the  second  platoon  will  be  moved 
to  the  front  by  the  means  above  stated,*  and  halted 
after  passing  some  steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the 
first  platoon  ;  the  deployment  will  then  be  made  by 
the  flank  according  to  the  principles  prescribed. 

160.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  rally  them 
on  the  battalion,  he  will  command  : 


Rally  on  the  battalion. 

161.  At  this  command,  the'  skirmishers  and  the  re- 
serve, no  matter  what  position  the  company  to  which 
they  belong  may  occupy  in  order  of  battle,  will  rap- 
idly unmask  the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing 
themselve.s  in  a  run  towards  its  nearest  flank,  and 
then  form  in  its  rear.  m 

162.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed  beyond 
the  line  of  file  closers,  the  men  will  take  the  quick  step, 
and  the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section  will  reform 
his  subdivision,  and  place  it  in  column  behind  the  wing 
on  which  it"is  rallied,  and  at  ten  paces  from  the  rank 
of  the  file  closers.  These  subdivisions  Will  not  be  mov- 
ed except  by  order  of  the  commander  of  the  battalion, 
who  may,  if  he  thinks  proper,  throw  them  into  lino  of 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  205 

battle  at  the  extremities  of  the  line,  or  in  the  inter- 
vals between  the  battalions. 

163.  If.  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the 
same  wings  of  a  battalion,  or  behind  any  shelter  what- 
soever, they  should,  be  formed  always  into  close  col- 
umn, or  into  column  at  half  distance. 

164.  When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  company  of 
skirmishers,  shall  be  formed  into  square,  the  platoon* 
and  sections  of  the  covering  company  will  he  directed 
by  their  chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will 
be  opened  at  the  angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers, 
who  will  be  then  formed  into  close  column  by  platoons 
in  rear  of  the  first  front  of  the  square. 

165.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles  of 
the  square  from  being  opened,  the  skirmishers  will 
throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank  men, 
the  right  knee  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  piece 
resting  on  the  thigh,  the  bayonet  in  a  threatened  po- 
sition. \  part  may  also  place  themselves  about  the 
angles,  where  they  can  render  good  service  by  de- 
fending the  sectors  without  fire. 

166.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are 
rallied  be  in  column  ready  to  form  square,  the  skir- 
mishers will  be  formed  into  close  column  by  platoon, 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  third  division,  and  at  the 
command,  Form  square — March,  they  will  move  for- 
ward and  close  on  the.  buglers. 

167.  When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  platoon 
or  section  behind  the  wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it  be 
wished  to  deploy  them  again  to  the  front,  they  will  be 
marched  by  the  flank  towards  the  intervals  on  the 


206  INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 

wings,  and  be  then  deployed  so  as  to  cover  the  front 
of  the  battalion. 

168.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the  in- 
terior of  squares  or  columns,  are  to  be  deployed,  they 
will  be  marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and  then  thrown 
forward,  as  is  prescribed,  No.  157 ;  as  soon  as  they 
shall  have  unmasked  the  column  or  square,  they  will 
be  deployed,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the 
left  file. 

) 

The  assembly, 

169.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be 
assembled  when  there  is  no  longer  danger  of  its  being 
disturbed ;  the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually  in 
quick  time. 

170.  The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmish- 
ers on  the  reserve,  will  command  : 

Assemble  on  the  reserve. 

171.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  assem- 
ble by  groups  of  fours;  the  front  rank  men  will  place 
themselves  behind  the  rear  rank  men;  and  each 
group  of  fours  will  direct  itself  on  the  reserve,  where 
each  will  take  its  proper  place  in  the  ranks.  When 
the  company  is  re-formed,  it  will  rejoin  the  battalion  to 
which  it  belongs. 

172.  It  may  be  also  proper  to  assemble  the  skir- 
mishers on  the  centre,  or  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
line,  either  marching  or  at  a  halt. 

173.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble  them 
on  tbe  centre  while  marching,  he  will  command : 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  207 

Assemble  on  the  centre. 


174.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  con- 
tinue to  march  directly  to  the  front  on  the  point  indi- 
cated;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  directing  tile  will 
follow  the  guide,  and  be  covered  by  his  rear  rank 
man  ;  the  other  two  comrades  of  this  group,  and  like- 
wise those  on  their  left,  will  march  diagonally,  advan- 
cing the  left  shoulder  and  accelerating  the  gait,  so  as 
tb  re  -form  the  groups  while  drawing  nearer  and  near- 
er the  directing  file  ;  the  men  of  the  right  section  will 
unite  in  the  same  manner  into  groups,  and  then  upon 
the  directing  file,  throwing  forward  the  right  shoulder. 
As  they  successively  unite  on  the  centre,  the  men 
will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

176.  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat 
will  also  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, the  front  rank  men  marching  behind  their  rear 
rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt, 
and  on  the  Hue  they  occupy,  the  captain  will  give  the 
same  commands  ;  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right 
or  left,  according  as  they  should  march  by  the  right 
or  left  flank,  re-form  the  groups  while  marching,  and 
thus  arrive  on  the  file  which  served  as  the  point  of 
formation.  As  they  successively  arrive,  the  skir- 
mishers will  support  arms. 


•908  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHIRS. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers,  and  to 
rally  this  battalion. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

■  178.  A  battalion  being  in  line*of  battle,  if  the  com- 
mander should  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  right  of  the 
sixth  company,  holding  the  three  right  companies  in 
reserve,  he  will  signify  his  intention  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  adjutant,  and  also  to  the  major,  who  will 
be  directed  to  take  charge  of  the  reserve.  He  will 
point  out  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  the  direction  he 
wishes  to  give  the  line,  as  well  as  the  point  where  ho 
wishes  the  right  ot  the  sixth  company  to  rest,  and  to 
the  commander  of  the  reserve  the  place  ho  lfiay  wish 
it  established. 

179.  The'  lieutenant  colonel  will  move  rapidly  in 
front  of  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  and  the  ad- 
jutant in  front  of  the  left  of  the  same  company.  The' 
commander  of  the  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  in  the 
manner  to  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

180.  The  colonel  will  command: 

1 .  First  (or  second)  platoons — as  skirmishers. 
3.  On  the  right   of  the  sixth  company — take  inter- 
vals. 

3.  March  for  double  quick— -March). 

181.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the 
fifth  aud  sixth  companies  will  prepare  to  deploy  the 


oe» 


kSQ»"     ^ 


, 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  209 

first  platoon  of  their  respective  companies,  the  sixth 
on  its  right,  and  the  fifth  on  its  left.  • 

1-82.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  face 
it  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  of  the  seventh-  and 
eighth  companies  will  face  their  respective  companies 
to  the  left. 

183.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will 
commence.  The  platoons  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  com- 
panies will  deploy  forward ;  the  rigM  guide  of  the 
sixth  will  march  to  the  point  which  will  be  indicated 
to  him  by  the  lieutenant  colonel.' 

184.  The  company  which  has  faced  to  the  right, 
and  also  the  companies  which  have  faced  to  the  left, 
will  march  straight  forward.  The  fourth  company 
will  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces,  counting 
from  the  left  to  the  fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  its 
first  platoon  on  its  left  file.  The  seventh  and  eighth 
companies  will  each  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred 
paces,  counting  from  the  first  file  of  the  company^ 
which  is  immediately  on  its  right;  and  the  chiefs- of 
these  companies  will  afterwards  deploy  their  first 
platoons  on  the  right  file. 

1-5.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which  the 
deployment  is  made,  should  be  careful  to  direct  them- 
selves towards  the  outer  man  of  the  neighboring  com- 
pany, already  deployed  as  skirmishers;  or  if  the  com- 
pany has  not  finished  its  deployment,  they  will  judge 
carefully  the  distance  which  may  still  be-  required  (to 
place  all  these  files  in  line,  and  will  then  march 
on  the  point  thus  marked  out.  The  companies,  as  they 


310  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

arrive  on  the  line,  will  align  themselves  on  those  al- 
ready deployed. 

186.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  will  follow 
the  deployment,  the  one  on  the  right,  the' other  on  the 
left ;  the  movement  concluded,  they  will  place  them- 
selves near  the  colonel. 

187.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  estab- 
lished in  echelon  in  the  following  manner;  the  re- 
serve of  the  sixth  company  will  be  placed  oae  hundred 
and  fifty  paces  m  the  rear  of  the  right  of  this  company ; 
the  reserves  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  united, 
opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of  skirmishers,  and 
thirty  paces  in  advance  of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  com- 
pany ;  the  reserves  of  the  seventh  and  eight  compa- 
nies, also  united,  opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of 
skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  farther  to  the  rear  than 
the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company. 

188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  com- 
posing the  reserve,  on  receiving  an  order  from  the 
colonel  to  that  effect,  will  march  these  companies 
thirty  paces  to  the  rear,  and  will  then  ploy  them  into 
column  by  company,  at  half  distance ;  after  which,  he 
will  conduct  the  column  to  the  point  which  shall  have 
.been  indicated  to  him. 

189.  The  colonel  will  have  a  general  superintend- 
ence of  the  movement ;  and  when  it  is  finished,  will 
move  to  a  point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence  his  view 
may  best  embrace  all  the  parts,  in  order  to  direct 
their  movements. 

190.  If,  instead  of  deploying- forward,  it  be  desired 
to  deploy  by  the  flank,  the  sixth  and  fifth  companies 
will  be  moved  to  the  front  ten  or  twelve  paces,  halted, 
and  deployed  by  the  flank,  the  one  on  the  right,  the 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  Ill 

other  on  the  left  file,  by  the  means  already  indicated. 
Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the 
flank;  and  as  soon  as  the  last  file  of  the  company* 
next  towards  the  direction,  shall  have  taken  its  inter- 
val, it  will  be  moved  upon  the  line  established  by  the 
fifth  and  sixth  companies,  halted  and  deployed. 

191.  In  the  preceding  example,  it  has  been  supposed 
that  the  battalion  was  in  the  order  of  battle  ;  but  if  in 
column,  it  would  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  by  the 
same  commands  and  according,  to  the  same  principles. 

192.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  forward,  the 
directing  company,  as  soon -as  it  is  unmasked,  will  be 
moved  ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  will  be  then  deployed  on  thefile  indicated. 
Each  of  the  other  companies  will  take  its  interval  to 
the  right  or  left,  and  deploy  as  soon  as  it  is  taken. 

193.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the  flank, 
the  directing  company  will  be  moved  in  the  same 
manner  to  the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  and 
will  then  be  halted  and  be  ployed  by  the  flank  on  the 
file  indicated.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be 
marched  by  the  flank,  and  when  its  interval  is  taken, 
will  be  moved  on  the  line,  halted  and  deployed  as  soon 
as  the  company  next  towards  the  direction  shall  have 
finished  its  deployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribed  to  place  the  reserves  iff 
echelon,  in  order  that  they  may,  in  the  event  of  a  ral- 
ly, be  able  to  protect  themselves  without  injuring  each 
other;  and  the  reserves  of  two  contiguous  compa- 
nies have  been  united,  in  order  to  diminish  the  number 


212  INSTRUCTION^FOIt  SKIRMISHERS. 

of  the  echelon,  and  to  increase  their  capacity  for  re- 
sisting cavalry. 

195.  The  echelons,  in  example  given,  descend  from 
right  to  left,  but  they  may,  on  an  indication  from  the 
colonel  to  that  effect,  be  posted  on  the  same  princi- 
ple, so  as  to  descend  from  left  to  right. 

1$6.  When  the  color  company  is  to  be  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  the  color,  without  its  guard  will  be  de- 
tached and  remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 

The  rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various  move- 
ments prescribed  for  a  company,  to  be  executed  by  the 
battalion,  and  by  the  same  commands  and'Jfche  same 
signals.  When  he  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion,  he  will 
cause  the  rally  on  the  battalion  to  be  sounded,  and  will 
so  dispose  his  reserve  as  to  protect  this  movement. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be 
rallied  in  squares  on  their  respective  reserves ;  each 
reserve  of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form  the  first 
front  of  the  square,  throwing  to  the  rear  the  sections 
on  the  flanks;  the  skirmishers  who  arrive  first  will 
complete  the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last  the  fourth 
front.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  superintend 
the  rally,  and  as  fast  as  the  men  arrive,  they  will  form 
them  in  two  ranks,  without  regard  to  height,  and 
cause  them  to  face  outwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders  of 
squares  will  profit  by  any  interval  of  time  the  cavalry 
may  allow  for  putting  them  in  safety,  either  by  march- 


TPJ5" 


B 


n~;rC~ 


:u  a 


bi  j&e 


ffi 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  218  . 

ing  upon  the  battalion  reserve,  or  by  seeking  an  ad- 
vantageous position;  to  this  end,  each  of  the  squares 
will  be  formed  into  column,  and  march  in  this  order  ; 
and  if  "threatened  anew,  it  will  halt,  and  again  form 
itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  eompanies  successively  arrive  near  the 
battalion  reserve,  each  will  form  as  promptly  as 
possible,  and  without  regard  to  designation  or  num- 
ber, take  place  in  the  column  next  iu  rear  of  the  com- 
panies already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if 
itself  threatened  by  cavalry.  In  this  case,'  the  com- 
panies, in  inarching  towards  it,  will  place  themselves 
promptly  in  the  sectors  without  fire,  and  thus  march 
on  the  squares. 


END  OF  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


214  SWORD  MANUAL,  ETC. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE 
FOR  OFFICERS. 

POSITION   OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  UNDER  ARMS." 

The  carry.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which 
will  be  supported  against  the  right  hip,  the  back  of 
the  blade  against  the  shoulder. 

TO  SALUTE  WITH  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE. 

Three  times  (or  pauses.) 

Ono.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  person 
to  be  saluted,  raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpendicular- 
ly, the  point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  the  right 
eye,  the  guard  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  el- 
bow supported  on  the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by  ex- 
tending the  arm,  so  that  the  right  hand  may  be  brought 
to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain  in  that  posi- 
sition  until  the  person  to  whom  the  salute  is  rendered 
shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly  and  place 
the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  right  shoulder. 


* 


COLOR-SALUTE,  ETC.  215 

COLOR-SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-hearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or 
in  march,  will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the  color-lance 
supported  at  the  right  hip,  the  right  hand  generally 
placed  on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  to 
hold  it  steady.  When  the  color  has  to  render  honors, 
the  color-bearer  will  salute  as  follows  : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  sljp  the  right  hand  along 
the  lance  to  the  height  of  the  eye  ;  lower  the  lance  by 
straightening  the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  the  heel  of 
the  lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and  bring  back  the 
lance  to  the  habitual  position  when  the  person  saluted 
shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 


MANUAL. 

FOR    RELIEVING   SENTINELS. 

Arms— Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  lock 
to  tha  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  instant  with 
both  hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left  at  the 
lower  band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing  towards  the  muz- 


■t   r ; — r 

216  RELIEVING  SENTINELS. 

zle,  the  barrel  sloping  upwards  and  crossing  opposite 
the  point  of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  proportionally 
Jowered.  The  palm  of  the  right  hand  will  be  above, 
and  that  of  the  left  under  the  piece,  the  nails  of  both 
hands  next  to  the  body  to  which  the  elbows  will  be 
Closed. 


Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 


(First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  right 
shoulder,  placing  the  right  hand  as  in  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  the  fingers  extended. 

(Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the 
side. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms,  if  it  be  wished 
to  give  the  men  rest,  the  command  will  be : 

Parade— Rest. 


At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel  of 
the  butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  the  muzzle  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  body;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with 
the  left  hand  just  above,  and  with  the  right  at  the 
upper  band;  carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  to  the 
rear,  the  left  knee  slightly  bent. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC.         217 

INSTRUCTION 

FOR  THE  CHIEF  BUGLER  AND  DRUM  MAJOR. 

The  posts  of  the  field  music  and  band  have  been 
given  Title  I,  for  the  order  in  battle. 

In  column,  -in  manoeuvre,  the  field  music  and  band 
will  march  abreast  with  the  left  centre  company,  and 
on  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

In  column  in  route,  as  well  as  in  the  passage  of  de- 
files to  the  front  or  in  retreat,  they  will  march  at  the 
head  of  their  respective  battalions. 

GENERAL  CALLS. 

1.  Attention. 

2.  The  general. 

3.  The  assembly. 

4.  To  the  color. 

5.  The  recall. 

6.  Quick  time. 

7.  Double  quick  time. 

8.  The  charge. 

9.  The  reveille. 

10.  Retreat. 

11.  Tattoo. 

12.  To  extinguish  lights. 

13.  Assembly  of  the  buglers. 

14.  Assembly  of  the  guard. 

16.   Orders  for  orderly  sergeants. 


218        INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC. 

'     16.  For  officers  to  take  their  places  in  line 
after  firing. 

17.  The  disperse. 

18.  Officers'  call. 

19.  Breakfast  call.  ^_ 

20.  Dinner  call. 

21.  Sick  call. 

22.  Fatigue  call. 

23.  Church  call. 

24.  Drill  call, 

25.  School  call. 

CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

1.  Fix  bayonet. 

2.  Unfix  bayonet. 

3.  Quick  time. 

4.  Double  quick  time. 

5.  The  run. 

6.  Deploy  as  skirmishers. 

7.  Forward. 

8.  In  retreat. 

9.  Halt. 

10.  By  the  right  flank. 

11.  By  the  left  flank. 

12.  Commence  firing. 

13.  Ce«sc  firing. 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right. 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC       219 

16.  Lie  down. 

17.  Riss  up. 

18.  Rally  by  fours. 

19.  Rally  by  section. 

20.  Rally  by  platoons. 

21.  Rally  on  the  reservs. 

22.  Rally  on  bmttalion. 

23.  Assemble  on  the  battalion. 


Note. — When  the  whole  of  the  troops,  in  the  same 
camp  or  garrison,  are  to  depart,  the  general,  the  assem- 
bly, and  to  the  color,  will  be  beaten  or  sounded,  at  the 
proper  intervals,  in  the  order  here  mentioned.  At 
the  first,  the  troops  will  prepare  for  the  movement, 
at  the  second,  they  will  form  by  company,  and  at  the 
third  unite  by  battalion. 


Il 


t« 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 
Vol.  I. 


TITLE  FIEST. 

Article  First. 

Page. 
Formation  of  a  regiment  in  order  of  battle  or  in  line  5 
Posts  of  company  officers,  sergeants  and  corporals,     7 

Posts  of  field  officers  and  regimental  staff ...     8 

Posts  cf  field  music  and  band 9 

Color-guard 9 

General  guides - 10 

Article  Second. 

Instruction  of  the  battalion 11 

Instruction  of   officers.... 13 

Instruction  of  sergeants 14 

Instruction  of  corporals 14 

0oramauds 15 

(221) 


*22  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

TITLE    SECOND. 
SCHOOL    OF  THE    SOLDIER. 

PART  FIRST. 

Page. 
General  rules  and  division  of  the  School  of  the 
Soldier 16 

Lesson  I. — Position  of  the  soldier  (No.  78)  Eyes 
right,  left  and  front  (Nos.  80,  83) 18 

Lesson  //.—Facings  (Nos.  88,  91) 23 

Lesson  III. — Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  com- 
mon and  quick  time  (Nos.  94,  102) 24 

Letson  IV. — Principles  of  the  double  quick  step 
(No.  104)..:. 26 

PART  SECOND. 

General  rules 28 

Lesson  I. — Principles  of  shouldered  arms.. 29 

Lesson  //.—Manual  of  arms.   Support  arms  (No 

133.)    Present  arms  (No.  143.)     Order  arms 
.    (No.  147.)    Position  of  order  arms  (No.  149.) 

Load  in  nine  times  (No.  156.)    Ready  (No. 

171.)    Aim  (No.  174.)    Fire  (No.  177.)    Fix 

bayonet  (No.  188.)    Charge  bayonet  (No.  193.) 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  223 

Page. 

Trail  arms  (No  197.)  Unfix  bayonet(No.  200.) 
Secure  arms  (No.  204.)  Eight  shoulder  shift 
arms  (No.  210.)  Arms  at  will  (No.  219.) 
Ground  arms  (No.  222.)  Inspection  arms  (No. 
227.)  Remarks  on  the  manual  of  arms  (No. 
237.)  Mark  time  (No.  241.)  Change  step  (No. 
245.)    March  backwards  (No.  247.) 30 

Lesson  III. — Load  in  four  times  (No.  250.) 
Load  at  will  (No.  257.) 56 

Lesson  IV. — Firings.  Direct  fire  (No.  261.) 
Oblique  firings  (No.  266  )  Position  of  the  two 
ranks  in  the  oblique  fire  to  the  right  (No.  267.) 
Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  oblique  fire 
to  the  left  (No.  270.)  Fire  by  file  (No.  275.) 
Fire  by  rank  (No.  285.) 57 

Lesson  V. — Fire  and  load  keeling  (No.  292.) 
Fire  and  load  lying  (No.  300r) 63 

Lesson  VI. — Bayonet  exercise : 65 

PART  THIRD. 

Lesson  I. — Alignments 67 

Lesson  II. — March  by  the  front  [No.  325.]  March 
by  the  front  in  double  quick  time  [No.  334.] 
Face  about  in  marching  [No.  343.  J  March 
backwards  [No.  345.] 70 

Lesson  ///.—March  by  the  flank  [No.  351.] 
March  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time  [No. 
363.] 76 


224  table  of  contents. 

Page. 
Lesson  IV. — General  principles  of  wheeling  [No. 

377.]  Wheeling  from  a '  halt  [No.  383.] 
Wheeling  in  marching  [No.  393.]  Turning  [No. 
400.]     Wheeling  and  turning  in  double  quick 

time  [No.  403.] , 80 

Lesson  V. — Long  marches  in  double  quick  time, 
and  the  run  [No.  406.]  Stack  arms  [No.  410.] 
Takearms  [No.  413.] 87 


TITLE    THIRD. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the 
company ~ 90 

Lesson  First. 

Article  L  -To  open  ranks  [No  8. ] 93 

Article   //.—Alignments  in  open  ranks  [No.  18.]  95 

Article  ///.—Manual  of  arms  [No.  26.  ] 97 

Article  IV.— To  close  ranks  [No.  28. ] 98 

Article  V. — Alignments  and  manual  of  arms  in 

closed  ranks  [No.  30.] 98 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  225 

Lesson  Second. 

Pagb. 
Article   I. — To  load   in  four  times,  and  at  will 

(No.  44) - 100 

Article  //.—To  fire  by  company  (No.  48) 101 

Article  ///.—To  fire  by  file  (No.  55 ) 102 

Article  IV— To  fire  by  rank  (No.  58) 103 

Article  F.— To  fire  by  the  rear  rank  (No.  68). ..  105 


Lesson  Third. 

ArticU  /.—To  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  84)  108 
Article  II. — To  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line 

of  battle,  and  to  align  it  (No.  99; Ill 

Article  III. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle  (No. 

101) Ill 

Article  IV. — To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double 

quick  time,  and  the  back  step  (No.  109) 113 

Article  V.—Te  march  in  retreat  (No.  119) 115 


Lesson  Fourth. 

Article  /.—To  march  by  the  flank  [No.  135] 118 

Article  //.—To  change  direction  by  fil«  [No  142]  120 
Article  III. — To  halt  the  eompany,  marching  by 
the  flank,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front  [No.  145]  121 


226  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Pag« 

Article  IV. — The  company  being  in  march  by  the 
flank,  to  form  it  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  in- 
to line  of  battle  [No.  148] 121 

Article  V. — The  company  marching  by  the  flank, 
to  form  it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  or  left  in  march- 
ing [No.  153} 123 

Lesson  Fifth. 

Article  I. — To  break   into   column  by  platoon, 

either  at  a  halt,  or  marching  [No.  171] 127 

Article  II.— To  march  in  column  [No.  195] ^ .   132 

Article  III.— To  change  direction  [No.  211] 135 

Article  IV.— To  halt  the  column  [No.  231] 140 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form 
to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at 
a  halt  or  marching  [No.  235] 140 

Lesson  Sixth. 

Article  I. — To  break  the  company  into  platoons, 
and  to  re-form  the  company  [No.  265] 146 

Article  II. — To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to 
cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line  [No.  289] 150 

Article  III. — To  march  in  column  in  route;  and 
to  execute  the  movements  incident  thfereto 
[No.  306] J 154 

Article  IV.— Countermarch  [No.  334  ] 1 60 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  t27 

Page. 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon  to  form 
on  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  [No.  343]  162 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  sin- 
gle rank,  and  reciprocally  [No.  359] 165 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into 
four  and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt  and  marching 
[No.  371)....... 167 


INSTRUCTION. 

FOR    SKIREISHE'BS. 

General  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction  171 

Article  First. 

Deployments  [No,  15.]  Deploy  forward  [No.  22.] 
Deploy  by  the  flank  [No.  37.]  Extend  inter- 
vals [No.  51.]  Close-intervals  [No.  59.]  Re- 
lieve skirmishers  [No.  66] 174 

Article  Second,  i 

March  to  the  front  [No.  71.]  March  in  retreat 
[No.  79.  ]  Change  direction  [No.  86.]  March 
by  theflaBk  [No.  96] 186 


2*8  table  of  contents. 

Articlk  Third. 

Page. 

Firings  [.No.  106.]  Fire  at  a  halt  [No.  107.]  Fire 
inarching  [No.  111.]  Observations  [No.  120].  191 

Article  Fourth. 

Rally  [No.  127.]  Rally  by  sections  [No.  132.] 
Rally  by  platoons  [No.  137.]  Rally  on  the  re- 
serve [No.  139.]  Form  column  [No. 14  3.]  Ral- 
ly on  the  battalion  [No.  161.  ]  Assemble  on 
the  reserve  [No.  171.]  Assemble  on  the  cen- 
tre [No.  174] 197 

Article  Fifth. 

Deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers  [No.  178.] 
Observations  [No.  194.  J    Rally  [No.  197 ] ... .  208 


Manual  of  the  sabre  for  officers - 214 

Salute  of  the  color :'....  215 

Manual  for  relieving  sentinels 215 

Instruction  for  parade  rest 216 

Instruction  for  chief  bugler,  <fcc 217 

General  calls 217 

Calls  for  skirmishers 218 


t 


r.i  ,35U$  jD  v.i 


^Tr" 


